OpenCores
URL https://opencores.org/ocsvn/openrisc/openrisc/trunk

Subversion Repositories openrisc

[/] [openrisc/] [trunk/] [gnu-stable/] [gdb-7.2/] [gdb/] [doc/] [gdbint.texinfo] - Blame information for rev 853

Go to most recent revision | Details | Compare with Previous | View Log

Line No. Rev Author Line
1 330 jeremybenn
\input texinfo   @c -*- texinfo -*-
2
@setfilename gdbint.info
3
@include gdb-cfg.texi
4
@settitle @value{GDBN} Internals
5
@setchapternewpage off
6
@dircategory Software development
7
@direntry
8
* Gdb-Internals: (gdbint).      The GNU debugger's internals.
9
@end direntry
10
 
11
@copying
12
Copyright @copyright{} 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1996, 1998, 1999,
13
2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2008, 2009, 2010
14
Free Software Foundation, Inc.
15
Contributed by Cygnus Solutions.  Written by John Gilmore.
16
Second Edition by Stan Shebs.
17
 
18
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
19
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or
20
any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
21
Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover
22
Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
23
Free Documentation License''.
24
@end copying
25
 
26
@ifnottex
27
This file documents the internals of the GNU debugger @value{GDBN}.
28
 
29
@insertcopying
30
@end ifnottex
31
 
32
 
33
@syncodeindex fn cp
34
@syncodeindex vr cp
35
 
36
@titlepage
37
@title @value{GDBN} Internals
38
@subtitle{A guide to the internals of the GNU debugger}
39
@author John Gilmore
40
@author Cygnus Solutions
41
@author Second Edition:
42
@author Stan Shebs
43
@author Cygnus Solutions
44
@page
45
@tex
46
\def\$#1${{#1}}  % Kluge: collect RCS revision info without $...$
47
\xdef\manvers{\$Revision$}  % For use in headers, footers too
48
{\parskip=0pt
49
\hfill Cygnus Solutions\par
50
\hfill \manvers\par
51
\hfill \TeX{}info \texinfoversion\par
52
}
53
@end tex
54
 
55
@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
56
@insertcopying
57
@end titlepage
58
 
59
@contents
60
 
61
@node Top
62
@c Perhaps this should be the title of the document (but only for info,
63
@c not for TeX).  Existing GNU manuals seem inconsistent on this point.
64
@top Scope of this Document
65
 
66
This document documents the internals of the GNU debugger, @value{GDBN}.  It
67
includes description of @value{GDBN}'s key algorithms and operations, as well
68
as the mechanisms that adapt @value{GDBN} to specific hosts and targets.
69
 
70
@menu
71
* Summary::
72
* Overall Structure::
73
* Algorithms::
74
* User Interface::
75
* libgdb::
76
* Values::
77
* Stack Frames::
78
* Symbol Handling::
79
* Language Support::
80
* Host Definition::
81
* Target Architecture Definition::
82
* Target Descriptions::
83
* Target Vector Definition::
84
* Native Debugging::
85
* Support Libraries::
86
* Coding::
87
* Porting GDB::
88
* Versions and Branches::
89
* Start of New Year Procedure::
90
* Releasing GDB::
91
* Testsuite::
92
* Hints::
93
 
94
* GDB Observers::  @value{GDBN} Currently available observers
95
* GNU Free Documentation License::  The license for this documentation
96
* Index::
97
@end menu
98
 
99
@node Summary
100
@chapter Summary
101
 
102
@menu
103
* Requirements::
104
* Contributors::
105
@end menu
106
 
107
@node Requirements
108
@section Requirements
109
@cindex requirements for @value{GDBN}
110
 
111
Before diving into the internals, you should understand the formal
112
requirements and other expectations for @value{GDBN}.  Although some
113
of these may seem obvious, there have been proposals for @value{GDBN}
114
that have run counter to these requirements.
115
 
116
First of all, @value{GDBN} is a debugger.  It's not designed to be a
117
front panel for embedded systems.  It's not a text editor.  It's not a
118
shell.  It's not a programming environment.
119
 
120
@value{GDBN} is an interactive tool.  Although a batch mode is
121
available, @value{GDBN}'s primary role is to interact with a human
122
programmer.
123
 
124
@value{GDBN} should be responsive to the user.  A programmer hot on
125
the trail of a nasty bug, and operating under a looming deadline, is
126
going to be very impatient of everything, including the response time
127
to debugger commands.
128
 
129
@value{GDBN} should be relatively permissive, such as for expressions.
130
While the compiler should be picky (or have the option to be made
131
picky), since source code lives for a long time usually, the
132
programmer doing debugging shouldn't be spending time figuring out to
133
mollify the debugger.
134
 
135
@value{GDBN} will be called upon to deal with really large programs.
136
Executable sizes of 50 to 100 megabytes occur regularly, and we've
137
heard reports of programs approaching 1 gigabyte in size.
138
 
139
@value{GDBN} should be able to run everywhere.  No other debugger is
140
available for even half as many configurations as @value{GDBN}
141
supports.
142
 
143
@node Contributors
144
@section Contributors
145
 
146
The first edition of this document was written by John Gilmore of
147
Cygnus Solutions. The current second edition was written by Stan Shebs
148
of Cygnus Solutions, who continues to update the manual.
149
 
150
Over the years, many others have made additions and changes to this
151
document. This section attempts to record the significant contributors
152
to that effort. One of the virtues of free software is that everyone
153
is free to contribute to it; with regret, we cannot actually
154
acknowledge everyone here.
155
 
156
@quotation
157
@emph{Plea:} This section has only been added relatively recently (four
158
years after publication of the second edition). Additions to this
159
section are particularly welcome.  If you or your friends (or enemies,
160
to be evenhanded) have been unfairly omitted from this list, we would
161
like to add your names!
162
@end quotation
163
 
164
A document such as this relies on being kept up to date by numerous
165
small updates by contributing engineers as they make changes to the
166
code base. The file @file{ChangeLog} in the @value{GDBN} distribution
167
approximates a blow-by-blow account. The most prolific contributors to
168
this important, but low profile task are Andrew Cagney (responsible
169
for over half the entries), Daniel Jacobowitz, Mark Kettenis, Jim
170
Blandy and Eli Zaretskii.
171
 
172
Eli Zaretskii and Daniel Jacobowitz wrote the sections documenting
173
watchpoints.
174
 
175
Jeremy Bennett updated the sections on initializing a new architecture
176
and register representation, and added the section on Frame Interpretation.
177
 
178
 
179
@node Overall Structure
180
 
181
@chapter Overall Structure
182
 
183
@value{GDBN} consists of three major subsystems: user interface,
184
symbol handling (the @dfn{symbol side}), and target system handling (the
185
@dfn{target side}).
186
 
187
The user interface consists of several actual interfaces, plus
188
supporting code.
189
 
190
The symbol side consists of object file readers, debugging info
191
interpreters, symbol table management, source language expression
192
parsing, type and value printing.
193
 
194
The target side consists of execution control, stack frame analysis, and
195
physical target manipulation.
196
 
197
The target side/symbol side division is not formal, and there are a
198
number of exceptions.  For instance, core file support involves symbolic
199
elements (the basic core file reader is in BFD) and target elements (it
200
supplies the contents of memory and the values of registers).  Instead,
201
this division is useful for understanding how the minor subsystems
202
should fit together.
203
 
204
@section The Symbol Side
205
 
206
The symbolic side of @value{GDBN} can be thought of as ``everything
207
you can do in @value{GDBN} without having a live program running''.
208
For instance, you can look at the types of variables, and evaluate
209
many kinds of expressions.
210
 
211
@section The Target Side
212
 
213
The target side of @value{GDBN} is the ``bits and bytes manipulator''.
214
Although it may make reference to symbolic info here and there, most
215
of the target side will run with only a stripped executable
216
available---or even no executable at all, in remote debugging cases.
217
 
218
Operations such as disassembly, stack frame crawls, and register
219
display, are able to work with no symbolic info at all.  In some cases,
220
such as disassembly, @value{GDBN} will use symbolic info to present addresses
221
relative to symbols rather than as raw numbers, but it will work either
222
way.
223
 
224
@section Configurations
225
 
226
@cindex host
227
@cindex target
228
@dfn{Host} refers to attributes of the system where @value{GDBN} runs.
229
@dfn{Target} refers to the system where the program being debugged
230
executes.  In most cases they are the same machine, in which case a
231
third type of @dfn{Native} attributes come into play.
232
 
233
Defines and include files needed to build on the host are host
234
support.  Examples are tty support, system defined types, host byte
235
order, host float format.  These are all calculated by @code{autoconf}
236
when the debugger is built.
237
 
238
Defines and information needed to handle the target format are target
239
dependent.  Examples are the stack frame format, instruction set,
240
breakpoint instruction, registers, and how to set up and tear down the stack
241
to call a function.
242
 
243
Information that is only needed when the host and target are the same,
244
is native dependent.  One example is Unix child process support; if the
245
host and target are not the same, calling @code{fork} to start the target
246
process is a bad idea.  The various macros needed for finding the
247
registers in the @code{upage}, running @code{ptrace}, and such are all
248
in the native-dependent files.
249
 
250
Another example of native-dependent code is support for features that
251
are really part of the target environment, but which require
252
@code{#include} files that are only available on the host system.  Core
253
file handling and @code{setjmp} handling are two common cases.
254
 
255
When you want to make @value{GDBN} work as the traditional native debugger
256
on a system, you will need to supply both target and native information.
257
 
258
@section Source Tree Structure
259
@cindex @value{GDBN} source tree structure
260
 
261
The @value{GDBN} source directory has a mostly flat structure---there
262
are only a few subdirectories.  A file's name usually gives a hint as
263
to what it does; for example, @file{stabsread.c} reads stabs,
264
@file{dwarf2read.c} reads @sc{DWARF 2}, etc.
265
 
266
Files that are related to some common task have names that share
267
common substrings.  For example, @file{*-thread.c} files deal with
268
debugging threads on various platforms; @file{*read.c} files deal with
269
reading various kinds of symbol and object files; @file{inf*.c} files
270
deal with direct control of the @dfn{inferior program} (@value{GDBN}
271
parlance for the program being debugged).
272
 
273
There are several dozens of files in the @file{*-tdep.c} family.
274
@samp{tdep} stands for @dfn{target-dependent code}---each of these
275
files implements debug support for a specific target architecture
276
(sparc, mips, etc).  Usually, only one of these will be used in a
277
specific @value{GDBN} configuration (sometimes two, closely related).
278
 
279
Similarly, there are many @file{*-nat.c} files, each one for native
280
debugging on a specific system (e.g., @file{sparc-linux-nat.c} is for
281
native debugging of Sparc machines running the Linux kernel).
282
 
283
The few subdirectories of the source tree are:
284
 
285
@table @file
286
@item cli
287
Code that implements @dfn{CLI}, the @value{GDBN} Command-Line
288
Interpreter.  @xref{User Interface, Command Interpreter}.
289
 
290
@item gdbserver
291
Code for the @value{GDBN} remote server.
292
 
293
@item gdbtk
294
Code for Insight, the @value{GDBN} TK-based GUI front-end.
295
 
296
@item mi
297
The @dfn{GDB/MI}, the @value{GDBN} Machine Interface interpreter.
298
 
299
@item signals
300
Target signal translation code.
301
 
302
@item tui
303
Code for @dfn{TUI}, the @value{GDBN} Text-mode full-screen User
304
Interface.  @xref{User Interface, TUI}.
305
@end table
306
 
307
@node Algorithms
308
 
309
@chapter Algorithms
310
@cindex algorithms
311
 
312
@value{GDBN} uses a number of debugging-specific algorithms.  They are
313
often not very complicated, but get lost in the thicket of special
314
cases and real-world issues.  This chapter describes the basic
315
algorithms and mentions some of the specific target definitions that
316
they use.
317
 
318
@section Prologue Analysis
319
 
320
@cindex prologue analysis
321
@cindex call frame information
322
@cindex CFI (call frame information)
323
To produce a backtrace and allow the user to manipulate older frames'
324
variables and arguments, @value{GDBN} needs to find the base addresses
325
of older frames, and discover where those frames' registers have been
326
saved.  Since a frame's ``callee-saves'' registers get saved by
327
younger frames if and when they're reused, a frame's registers may be
328
scattered unpredictably across younger frames.  This means that
329
changing the value of a register-allocated variable in an older frame
330
may actually entail writing to a save slot in some younger frame.
331
 
332
Modern versions of GCC emit Dwarf call frame information (``CFI''),
333
which describes how to find frame base addresses and saved registers.
334
But CFI is not always available, so as a fallback @value{GDBN} uses a
335
technique called @dfn{prologue analysis} to find frame sizes and saved
336
registers.  A prologue analyzer disassembles the function's machine
337
code starting from its entry point, and looks for instructions that
338
allocate frame space, save the stack pointer in a frame pointer
339
register, save registers, and so on.  Obviously, this can't be done
340
accurately in general, but it's tractable to do well enough to be very
341
helpful.  Prologue analysis predates the GNU toolchain's support for
342
CFI; at one time, prologue analysis was the only mechanism
343
@value{GDBN} used for stack unwinding at all, when the function
344
calling conventions didn't specify a fixed frame layout.
345
 
346
In the olden days, function prologues were generated by hand-written,
347
target-specific code in GCC, and treated as opaque and untouchable by
348
optimizers.  Looking at this code, it was usually straightforward to
349
write a prologue analyzer for @value{GDBN} that would accurately
350
understand all the prologues GCC would generate.  However, over time
351
GCC became more aggressive about instruction scheduling, and began to
352
understand more about the semantics of the prologue instructions
353
themselves; in response, @value{GDBN}'s analyzers became more complex
354
and fragile.  Keeping the prologue analyzers working as GCC (and the
355
instruction sets themselves) evolved became a substantial task.
356
 
357
@cindex @file{prologue-value.c}
358
@cindex abstract interpretation of function prologues
359
@cindex pseudo-evaluation of function prologues
360
To try to address this problem, the code in @file{prologue-value.h}
361
and @file{prologue-value.c} provides a general framework for writing
362
prologue analyzers that are simpler and more robust than ad-hoc
363
analyzers.  When we analyze a prologue using the prologue-value
364
framework, we're really doing ``abstract interpretation'' or
365
``pseudo-evaluation'': running the function's code in simulation, but
366
using conservative approximations of the values registers and memory
367
would hold when the code actually runs.  For example, if our function
368
starts with the instruction:
369
 
370
@example
371
addi r1, 42     # add 42 to r1
372
@end example
373
@noindent
374
we don't know exactly what value will be in @code{r1} after executing
375
this instruction, but we do know it'll be 42 greater than its original
376
value.
377
 
378
If we then see an instruction like:
379
 
380
@example
381
addi r1, 22     # add 22 to r1
382
@end example
383
@noindent
384
we still don't know what @code{r1's} value is, but again, we can say
385
it is now 64 greater than its original value.
386
 
387
If the next instruction were:
388
 
389
@example
390
mov r2, r1      # set r2 to r1's value
391
@end example
392
@noindent
393
then we can say that @code{r2's} value is now the original value of
394
@code{r1} plus 64.
395
 
396
It's common for prologues to save registers on the stack, so we'll
397
need to track the values of stack frame slots, as well as the
398
registers.  So after an instruction like this:
399
 
400
@example
401
mov (fp+4), r2
402
@end example
403
@noindent
404
then we'd know that the stack slot four bytes above the frame pointer
405
holds the original value of @code{r1} plus 64.
406
 
407
And so on.
408
 
409
Of course, this can only go so far before it gets unreasonable.  If we
410
wanted to be able to say anything about the value of @code{r1} after
411
the instruction:
412
 
413
@example
414
xor r1, r3      # exclusive-or r1 and r3, place result in r1
415
@end example
416
@noindent
417
then things would get pretty complex.  But remember, we're just doing
418
a conservative approximation; if exclusive-or instructions aren't
419
relevant to prologues, we can just say @code{r1}'s value is now
420
``unknown''.  We can ignore things that are too complex, if that loss of
421
information is acceptable for our application.
422
 
423
So when we say ``conservative approximation'' here, what we mean is an
424
approximation that is either accurate, or marked ``unknown'', but
425
never inaccurate.
426
 
427
Using this framework, a prologue analyzer is simply an interpreter for
428
machine code, but one that uses conservative approximations for the
429
contents of registers and memory instead of actual values.  Starting
430
from the function's entry point, you simulate instructions up to the
431
current PC, or an instruction that you don't know how to simulate.
432
Now you can examine the state of the registers and stack slots you've
433
kept track of.
434
 
435
@itemize @bullet
436
 
437
@item
438
To see how large your stack frame is, just check the value of the
439
stack pointer register; if it's the original value of the SP
440
minus a constant, then that constant is the stack frame's size.
441
If the SP's value has been marked as ``unknown'', then that means
442
the prologue has done something too complex for us to track, and
443
we don't know the frame size.
444
 
445
@item
446
To see where we've saved the previous frame's registers, we just
447
search the values we've tracked --- stack slots, usually, but
448
registers, too, if you want --- for something equal to the register's
449
original value.  If the calling conventions suggest a standard place
450
to save a given register, then we can check there first, but really,
451
anything that will get us back the original value will probably work.
452
@end itemize
453
 
454
This does take some work.  But prologue analyzers aren't
455
quick-and-simple pattern patching to recognize a few fixed prologue
456
forms any more; they're big, hairy functions.  Along with inferior
457
function calls, prologue analysis accounts for a substantial portion
458
of the time needed to stabilize a @value{GDBN} port.  So it's
459
worthwhile to look for an approach that will be easier to understand
460
and maintain.  In the approach described above:
461
 
462
@itemize @bullet
463
 
464
@item
465
It's easier to see that the analyzer is correct: you just see
466
whether the analyzer properly (albeit conservatively) simulates
467
the effect of each instruction.
468
 
469
@item
470
It's easier to extend the analyzer: you can add support for new
471
instructions, and know that you haven't broken anything that
472
wasn't already broken before.
473
 
474
@item
475
It's orthogonal: to gather new information, you don't need to
476
complicate the code for each instruction.  As long as your domain
477
of conservative values is already detailed enough to tell you
478
what you need, then all the existing instruction simulations are
479
already gathering the right data for you.
480
 
481
@end itemize
482
 
483
The file @file{prologue-value.h} contains detailed comments explaining
484
the framework and how to use it.
485
 
486
 
487
@section Breakpoint Handling
488
 
489
@cindex breakpoints
490
In general, a breakpoint is a user-designated location in the program
491
where the user wants to regain control if program execution ever reaches
492
that location.
493
 
494
There are two main ways to implement breakpoints; either as ``hardware''
495
breakpoints or as ``software'' breakpoints.
496
 
497
@cindex hardware breakpoints
498
@cindex program counter
499
Hardware breakpoints are sometimes available as a builtin debugging
500
features with some chips.  Typically these work by having dedicated
501
register into which the breakpoint address may be stored.  If the PC
502
(shorthand for @dfn{program counter})
503
ever matches a value in a breakpoint registers, the CPU raises an
504
exception and reports it to @value{GDBN}.
505
 
506
Another possibility is when an emulator is in use; many emulators
507
include circuitry that watches the address lines coming out from the
508
processor, and force it to stop if the address matches a breakpoint's
509
address.
510
 
511
A third possibility is that the target already has the ability to do
512
breakpoints somehow; for instance, a ROM monitor may do its own
513
software breakpoints.  So although these are not literally ``hardware
514
breakpoints'', from @value{GDBN}'s point of view they work the same;
515
@value{GDBN} need not do anything more than set the breakpoint and wait
516
for something to happen.
517
 
518
Since they depend on hardware resources, hardware breakpoints may be
519
limited in number; when the user asks for more, @value{GDBN} will
520
start trying to set software breakpoints.  (On some architectures,
521
notably the 32-bit x86 platforms, @value{GDBN} cannot always know
522
whether there's enough hardware resources to insert all the hardware
523
breakpoints and watchpoints.  On those platforms, @value{GDBN} prints
524
an error message only when the program being debugged is continued.)
525
 
526
@cindex software breakpoints
527
Software breakpoints require @value{GDBN} to do somewhat more work.
528
The basic theory is that @value{GDBN} will replace a program
529
instruction with a trap, illegal divide, or some other instruction
530
that will cause an exception, and then when it's encountered,
531
@value{GDBN} will take the exception and stop the program.  When the
532
user says to continue, @value{GDBN} will restore the original
533
instruction, single-step, re-insert the trap, and continue on.
534
 
535
Since it literally overwrites the program being tested, the program area
536
must be writable, so this technique won't work on programs in ROM.  It
537
can also distort the behavior of programs that examine themselves,
538
although such a situation would be highly unusual.
539
 
540
Also, the software breakpoint instruction should be the smallest size of
541
instruction, so it doesn't overwrite an instruction that might be a jump
542
target, and cause disaster when the program jumps into the middle of the
543
breakpoint instruction.  (Strictly speaking, the breakpoint must be no
544
larger than the smallest interval between instructions that may be jump
545
targets; perhaps there is an architecture where only even-numbered
546
instructions may jumped to.)  Note that it's possible for an instruction
547
set not to have any instructions usable for a software breakpoint,
548
although in practice only the ARC has failed to define such an
549
instruction.
550
 
551
Basic breakpoint object handling is in @file{breakpoint.c}.  However,
552
much of the interesting breakpoint action is in @file{infrun.c}.
553
 
554
@table @code
555
@cindex insert or remove software breakpoint
556
@findex target_remove_breakpoint
557
@findex target_insert_breakpoint
558
@item target_remove_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
559
@itemx target_insert_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
560
Insert or remove a software breakpoint at address
561
@code{@var{bp_tgt}->placed_address}.  Returns zero for success,
562
non-zero for failure.  On input, @var{bp_tgt} contains the address of the
563
breakpoint, and is otherwise initialized to zero.  The fields of the
564
@code{struct bp_target_info} pointed to by @var{bp_tgt} are updated
565
to contain other information about the breakpoint on output.  The field
566
@code{placed_address} may be updated if the breakpoint was placed at a
567
related address; the field @code{shadow_contents} contains the real
568
contents of the bytes where the breakpoint has been inserted,
569
if reading memory would return the breakpoint instead of the
570
underlying memory; the field @code{shadow_len} is the length of
571
memory cached in @code{shadow_contents}, if any; and the field
572
@code{placed_size} is optionally set and used by the target, if
573
it could differ from @code{shadow_len}.
574
 
575
For example, the remote target @samp{Z0} packet does not require
576
shadowing memory, so @code{shadow_len} is left at zero.  However,
577
the length reported by @code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc} is cached in
578
@code{placed_size}, so that a matching @samp{z0} packet can be
579
used to remove the breakpoint.
580
 
581
@cindex insert or remove hardware breakpoint
582
@findex target_remove_hw_breakpoint
583
@findex target_insert_hw_breakpoint
584
@item target_remove_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
585
@itemx target_insert_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
586
Insert or remove a hardware-assisted breakpoint at address
587
@code{@var{bp_tgt}->placed_address}.  Returns zero for success,
588
non-zero for failure.  See @code{target_insert_breakpoint} for
589
a description of the @code{struct bp_target_info} pointed to by
590
@var{bp_tgt}; the @code{shadow_contents} and
591
@code{shadow_len} members are not used for hardware breakpoints,
592
but @code{placed_size} may be.
593
@end table
594
 
595
@section Single Stepping
596
 
597
@section Signal Handling
598
 
599
@section Thread Handling
600
 
601
@section Inferior Function Calls
602
 
603
@section Longjmp Support
604
 
605
@cindex @code{longjmp} debugging
606
@value{GDBN} has support for figuring out that the target is doing a
607
@code{longjmp} and for stopping at the target of the jump, if we are
608
stepping.  This is done with a few specialized internal breakpoints,
609
which are visible in the output of the @samp{maint info breakpoint}
610
command.
611
 
612
@findex gdbarch_get_longjmp_target
613
To make this work, you need to define a function called
614
@code{gdbarch_get_longjmp_target}, which will examine the
615
@code{jmp_buf} structure and extract the @code{longjmp} target address.
616
Since @code{jmp_buf} is target specific and typically defined in a
617
target header not available to @value{GDBN}, you will need to
618
determine the offset of the PC manually and return that; many targets
619
define a @code{jb_pc_offset} field in the tdep structure to save the
620
value once calculated.
621
 
622
@section Watchpoints
623
@cindex watchpoints
624
 
625
Watchpoints are a special kind of breakpoints (@pxref{Algorithms,
626
breakpoints}) which break when data is accessed rather than when some
627
instruction is executed.  When you have data which changes without
628
your knowing what code does that, watchpoints are the silver bullet to
629
hunt down and kill such bugs.
630
 
631
@cindex hardware watchpoints
632
@cindex software watchpoints
633
Watchpoints can be either hardware-assisted or not; the latter type is
634
known as ``software watchpoints.''  @value{GDBN} always uses
635
hardware-assisted watchpoints if they are available, and falls back on
636
software watchpoints otherwise.  Typical situations where @value{GDBN}
637
will use software watchpoints are:
638
 
639
@itemize @bullet
640
@item
641
The watched memory region is too large for the underlying hardware
642
watchpoint support.  For example, each x86 debug register can watch up
643
to 4 bytes of memory, so trying to watch data structures whose size is
644
more than 16 bytes will cause @value{GDBN} to use software
645
watchpoints.
646
 
647
@item
648
The value of the expression to be watched depends on data held in
649
registers (as opposed to memory).
650
 
651
@item
652
Too many different watchpoints requested.  (On some architectures,
653
this situation is impossible to detect until the debugged program is
654
resumed.)  Note that x86 debug registers are used both for hardware
655
breakpoints and for watchpoints, so setting too many hardware
656
breakpoints might cause watchpoint insertion to fail.
657
 
658
@item
659
No hardware-assisted watchpoints provided by the target
660
implementation.
661
@end itemize
662
 
663
Software watchpoints are very slow, since @value{GDBN} needs to
664
single-step the program being debugged and test the value of the
665
watched expression(s) after each instruction.  The rest of this
666
section is mostly irrelevant for software watchpoints.
667
 
668
When the inferior stops, @value{GDBN} tries to establish, among other
669
possible reasons, whether it stopped due to a watchpoint being hit.
670
It first uses @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} to see if any watchpoint
671
was hit.  If not, all watchpoint checking is skipped.
672
 
673
Then @value{GDBN} calls @code{target_stopped_data_address} exactly
674
once.  This method returns the address of the watchpoint which
675
triggered, if the target can determine it.  If the triggered address
676
is available, @value{GDBN} compares the address returned by this
677
method with each watched memory address in each active watchpoint.
678
For data-read and data-access watchpoints, @value{GDBN} announces
679
every watchpoint that watches the triggered address as being hit.
680
For this reason, data-read and data-access watchpoints
681
@emph{require} that the triggered address be available; if not, read
682
and access watchpoints will never be considered hit.  For data-write
683
watchpoints, if the triggered address is available, @value{GDBN}
684
considers only those watchpoints which match that address;
685
otherwise, @value{GDBN} considers all data-write watchpoints.  For
686
each data-write watchpoint that @value{GDBN} considers, it evaluates
687
the expression whose value is being watched, and tests whether the
688
watched value has changed.  Watchpoints whose watched values have
689
changed are announced as hit.
690
 
691
@c FIXME move these to the main lists of target/native defns
692
 
693
@value{GDBN} uses several macros and primitives to support hardware
694
watchpoints:
695
 
696
@table @code
697
@findex TARGET_CAN_USE_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINT
698
@item TARGET_CAN_USE_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINT (@var{type}, @var{count}, @var{other})
699
Return the number of hardware watchpoints of type @var{type} that are
700
possible to be set.  The value is positive if @var{count} watchpoints
701
of this type can be set, zero if setting watchpoints of this type is
702
not supported, and negative if @var{count} is more than the maximum
703
number of watchpoints of type @var{type} that can be set.  @var{other}
704
is non-zero if other types of watchpoints are currently enabled (there
705
are architectures which cannot set watchpoints of different types at
706
the same time).
707
 
708
@findex TARGET_REGION_OK_FOR_HW_WATCHPOINT
709
@item TARGET_REGION_OK_FOR_HW_WATCHPOINT (@var{addr}, @var{len})
710
Return non-zero if hardware watchpoints can be used to watch a region
711
whose address is @var{addr} and whose length in bytes is @var{len}.
712
 
713
@cindex insert or remove hardware watchpoint
714
@findex target_insert_watchpoint
715
@findex target_remove_watchpoint
716
@item target_insert_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
717
@itemx target_remove_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
718
Insert or remove a hardware watchpoint starting at @var{addr}, for
719
@var{len} bytes.  @var{type} is the watchpoint type, one of the
720
possible values of the enumerated data type @code{target_hw_bp_type},
721
defined by @file{breakpoint.h} as follows:
722
 
723
@smallexample
724
 enum target_hw_bp_type
725
   @{
726
     hw_write   = 0, /* Common (write) HW watchpoint */
727
     hw_read    = 1, /* Read    HW watchpoint */
728
     hw_access  = 2, /* Access (read or write) HW watchpoint */
729
     hw_execute = 3  /* Execute HW breakpoint */
730
   @};
731
@end smallexample
732
 
733
@noindent
734
These two macros should return 0 for success, non-zero for failure.
735
 
736
@findex target_stopped_data_address
737
@item target_stopped_data_address (@var{addr_p})
738
If the inferior has some watchpoint that triggered, place the address
739
associated with the watchpoint at the location pointed to by
740
@var{addr_p} and return non-zero.  Otherwise, return zero.  This
741
is required for data-read and data-access watchpoints.  It is
742
not required for data-write watchpoints, but @value{GDBN} uses
743
it to improve handling of those also.
744
 
745
@value{GDBN} will only call this method once per watchpoint stop,
746
immediately after calling @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT}.  If the
747
target's watchpoint indication is sticky, i.e., stays set after
748
resuming, this method should clear it.  For instance, the x86 debug
749
control register has sticky triggered flags.
750
 
751
@findex target_watchpoint_addr_within_range
752
@item target_watchpoint_addr_within_range (@var{target}, @var{addr}, @var{start}, @var{length})
753
Check whether @var{addr} (as returned by @code{target_stopped_data_address})
754
lies within the hardware-defined watchpoint region described by
755
@var{start} and @var{length}.  This only needs to be provided if the
756
granularity of a watchpoint is greater than one byte, i.e., if the
757
watchpoint can also trigger on nearby addresses outside of the watched
758
region.
759
 
760
@findex HAVE_STEPPABLE_WATCHPOINT
761
@item HAVE_STEPPABLE_WATCHPOINT
762
If defined to a non-zero value, it is not necessary to disable a
763
watchpoint to step over it.  Like @code{gdbarch_have_nonsteppable_watchpoint},
764
this is usually set when watchpoints trigger at the instruction
765
which will perform an interesting read or write.  It should be
766
set if there is a temporary disable bit which allows the processor
767
to step over the interesting instruction without raising the
768
watchpoint exception again.
769
 
770
@findex gdbarch_have_nonsteppable_watchpoint
771
@item int gdbarch_have_nonsteppable_watchpoint (@var{gdbarch})
772
If it returns a non-zero value, @value{GDBN} should disable a
773
watchpoint to step the inferior over it.  This is usually set when
774
watchpoints trigger at the instruction which will perform an
775
interesting read or write.
776
 
777
@findex HAVE_CONTINUABLE_WATCHPOINT
778
@item HAVE_CONTINUABLE_WATCHPOINT
779
If defined to a non-zero value, it is possible to continue the
780
inferior after a watchpoint has been hit.  This is usually set
781
when watchpoints trigger at the instruction following an interesting
782
read or write.
783
 
784
@findex STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT
785
@item STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT (@var{wait_status})
786
Return non-zero if stopped by a watchpoint.  @var{wait_status} is of
787
the type @code{struct target_waitstatus}, defined by @file{target.h}.
788
Normally, this macro is defined to invoke the function pointed to by
789
the @code{to_stopped_by_watchpoint} member of the structure (of the
790
type @code{target_ops}, defined on @file{target.h}) that describes the
791
target-specific operations; @code{to_stopped_by_watchpoint} ignores
792
the @var{wait_status} argument.
793
 
794
@value{GDBN} does not require the non-zero value returned by
795
@code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} to be 100% correct, so if a target cannot
796
determine for sure whether the inferior stopped due to a watchpoint,
797
it could return non-zero ``just in case''.
798
@end table
799
 
800
@subsection Watchpoints and Threads
801
@cindex watchpoints, with threads
802
 
803
@value{GDBN} only supports process-wide watchpoints, which trigger
804
in all threads.  @value{GDBN} uses the thread ID to make watchpoints
805
act as if they were thread-specific, but it cannot set hardware
806
watchpoints that only trigger in a specific thread.  Therefore, even
807
if the target supports threads, per-thread debug registers, and
808
watchpoints which only affect a single thread, it should set the
809
per-thread debug registers for all threads to the same value.  On
810
@sc{gnu}/Linux native targets, this is accomplished by using
811
@code{ALL_LWPS} in @code{target_insert_watchpoint} and
812
@code{target_remove_watchpoint} and by using
813
@code{linux_set_new_thread} to register a handler for newly created
814
threads.
815
 
816
@value{GDBN}'s @sc{gnu}/Linux support only reports a single event
817
at a time, although multiple events can trigger simultaneously for
818
multi-threaded programs.  When multiple events occur, @file{linux-nat.c}
819
queues subsequent events and returns them the next time the program
820
is resumed.  This means that @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} and
821
@code{target_stopped_data_address} only need to consult the current
822
thread's state---the thread indicated by @code{inferior_ptid}.  If
823
two threads have hit watchpoints simultaneously, those routines
824
will be called a second time for the second thread.
825
 
826
@subsection x86 Watchpoints
827
@cindex x86 debug registers
828
@cindex watchpoints, on x86
829
 
830
The 32-bit Intel x86 (a.k.a.@: ia32) processors feature special debug
831
registers designed to facilitate debugging.  @value{GDBN} provides a
832
generic library of functions that x86-based ports can use to implement
833
support for watchpoints and hardware-assisted breakpoints.  This
834
subsection documents the x86 watchpoint facilities in @value{GDBN}.
835
 
836
(At present, the library functions read and write debug registers directly, and are
837
thus only available for native configurations.)
838
 
839
To use the generic x86 watchpoint support, a port should do the
840
following:
841
 
842
@itemize @bullet
843
@findex I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS
844
@item
845
Define the macro @code{I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS} somewhere in the
846
target-dependent headers.
847
 
848
@item
849
Include the @file{config/i386/nm-i386.h} header file @emph{after}
850
defining @code{I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS}.
851
 
852
@item
853
Add @file{i386-nat.o} to the value of the Make variable
854
@code{NATDEPFILES} (@pxref{Native Debugging, NATDEPFILES}).
855
 
856
@item
857
Provide implementations for the @code{I386_DR_LOW_*} macros described
858
below.  Typically, each macro should call a target-specific function
859
which does the real work.
860
@end itemize
861
 
862
The x86 watchpoint support works by maintaining mirror images of the
863
debug registers.  Values are copied between the mirror images and the
864
real debug registers via a set of macros which each target needs to
865
provide:
866
 
867
@table @code
868
@findex I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL
869
@item I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL (@var{val})
870
Set the Debug Control (DR7) register to the value @var{val}.
871
 
872
@findex I386_DR_LOW_SET_ADDR
873
@item I386_DR_LOW_SET_ADDR (@var{idx}, @var{addr})
874
Put the address @var{addr} into the debug register number @var{idx}.
875
 
876
@findex I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR
877
@item I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR (@var{idx})
878
Reset (i.e.@: zero out) the address stored in the debug register
879
number @var{idx}.
880
 
881
@findex I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS
882
@item I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS
883
Return the value of the Debug Status (DR6) register.  This value is
884
used immediately after it is returned by
885
@code{I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS}, so as to support per-thread status
886
register values.
887
@end table
888
 
889
For each one of the 4 debug registers (whose indices are from 0 to 3)
890
that store addresses, a reference count is maintained by @value{GDBN},
891
to allow sharing of debug registers by several watchpoints.  This
892
allows users to define several watchpoints that watch the same
893
expression, but with different conditions and/or commands, without
894
wasting debug registers which are in short supply.  @value{GDBN}
895
maintains the reference counts internally, targets don't have to do
896
anything to use this feature.
897
 
898
The x86 debug registers can each watch a region that is 1, 2, or 4
899
bytes long.  The ia32 architecture requires that each watched region
900
be appropriately aligned: 2-byte region on 2-byte boundary, 4-byte
901
region on 4-byte boundary.  However, the x86 watchpoint support in
902
@value{GDBN} can watch unaligned regions and regions larger than 4
903
bytes (up to 16 bytes) by allocating several debug registers to watch
904
a single region.  This allocation of several registers per a watched
905
region is also done automatically without target code intervention.
906
 
907
The generic x86 watchpoint support provides the following API for the
908
@value{GDBN}'s application code:
909
 
910
@table @code
911
@findex i386_region_ok_for_watchpoint
912
@item i386_region_ok_for_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len})
913
The macro @code{TARGET_REGION_OK_FOR_HW_WATCHPOINT} is set to call
914
this function.  It counts the number of debug registers required to
915
watch a given region, and returns a non-zero value if that number is
916
less than 4, the number of debug registers available to x86
917
processors.
918
 
919
@findex i386_stopped_data_address
920
@item i386_stopped_data_address (@var{addr_p})
921
The target function
922
@code{target_stopped_data_address} is set to call this function.
923
This
924
function examines the breakpoint condition bits in the DR6 Debug
925
Status register, as returned by the @code{I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS}
926
macro, and returns the address associated with the first bit that is
927
set in DR6.
928
 
929
@findex i386_stopped_by_watchpoint
930
@item i386_stopped_by_watchpoint (void)
931
The macro @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT}
932
is set to call this function.  The
933
argument passed to @code{STOPPED_BY_WATCHPOINT} is ignored.  This
934
function examines the breakpoint condition bits in the DR6 Debug
935
Status register, as returned by the @code{I386_DR_LOW_GET_STATUS}
936
macro, and returns true if any bit is set.  Otherwise, false is
937
returned.
938
 
939
@findex i386_insert_watchpoint
940
@findex i386_remove_watchpoint
941
@item i386_insert_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
942
@itemx i386_remove_watchpoint (@var{addr}, @var{len}, @var{type})
943
Insert or remove a watchpoint.  The macros
944
@code{target_insert_watchpoint} and @code{target_remove_watchpoint}
945
are set to call these functions.  @code{i386_insert_watchpoint} first
946
looks for a debug register which is already set to watch the same
947
region for the same access types; if found, it just increments the
948
reference count of that debug register, thus implementing debug
949
register sharing between watchpoints.  If no such register is found,
950
the function looks for a vacant debug register, sets its mirrored
951
value to @var{addr}, sets the mirrored value of DR7 Debug Control
952
register as appropriate for the @var{len} and @var{type} parameters,
953
and then passes the new values of the debug register and DR7 to the
954
inferior by calling @code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_ADDR} and
955
@code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL}.  If more than one debug register is
956
required to cover the given region, the above process is repeated for
957
each debug register.
958
 
959
@code{i386_remove_watchpoint} does the opposite: it resets the address
960
in the mirrored value of the debug register and its read/write and
961
length bits in the mirrored value of DR7, then passes these new
962
values to the inferior via @code{I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR} and
963
@code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL}.  If a register is shared by several
964
watchpoints, each time a @code{i386_remove_watchpoint} is called, it
965
decrements the reference count, and only calls
966
@code{I386_DR_LOW_RESET_ADDR} and @code{I386_DR_LOW_SET_CONTROL} when
967
the count goes to zero.
968
 
969
@findex i386_insert_hw_breakpoint
970
@findex i386_remove_hw_breakpoint
971
@item i386_insert_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
972
@itemx i386_remove_hw_breakpoint (@var{bp_tgt})
973
These functions insert and remove hardware-assisted breakpoints.  The
974
macros @code{target_insert_hw_breakpoint} and
975
@code{target_remove_hw_breakpoint} are set to call these functions.
976
The argument is a @code{struct bp_target_info *}, as described in
977
the documentation for @code{target_insert_breakpoint}.
978
These functions work like @code{i386_insert_watchpoint} and
979
@code{i386_remove_watchpoint}, respectively, except that they set up
980
the debug registers to watch instruction execution, and each
981
hardware-assisted breakpoint always requires exactly one debug
982
register.
983
 
984
@findex i386_cleanup_dregs
985
@item i386_cleanup_dregs (void)
986
This function clears all the reference counts, addresses, and control
987
bits in the mirror images of the debug registers.  It doesn't affect
988
the actual debug registers in the inferior process.
989
@end table
990
 
991
@noindent
992
@strong{Notes:}
993
@enumerate 1
994
@item
995
x86 processors support setting watchpoints on I/O reads or writes.
996
However, since no target supports this (as of March 2001), and since
997
@code{enum target_hw_bp_type} doesn't even have an enumeration for I/O
998
watchpoints, this feature is not yet available to @value{GDBN} running
999
on x86.
1000
 
1001
@item
1002
x86 processors can enable watchpoints locally, for the current task
1003
only, or globally, for all the tasks.  For each debug register,
1004
there's a bit in the DR7 Debug Control register that determines
1005
whether the associated address is watched locally or globally.  The
1006
current implementation of x86 watchpoint support in @value{GDBN}
1007
always sets watchpoints to be locally enabled, since global
1008
watchpoints might interfere with the underlying OS and are probably
1009
unavailable in many platforms.
1010
@end enumerate
1011
 
1012
@section Checkpoints
1013
@cindex checkpoints
1014
@cindex restart
1015
In the abstract, a checkpoint is a point in the execution history of
1016
the program, which the user may wish to return to at some later time.
1017
 
1018
Internally, a checkpoint is a saved copy of the program state, including
1019
whatever information is required in order to restore the program to that
1020
state at a later time.  This can be expected to include the state of
1021
registers and memory, and may include external state such as the state
1022
of open files and devices.
1023
 
1024
There are a number of ways in which checkpoints may be implemented
1025
in gdb, e.g.@: as corefiles, as forked processes, and as some opaque
1026
method implemented on the target side.
1027
 
1028
A corefile can be used to save an image of target memory and register
1029
state, which can in principle be restored later --- but corefiles do
1030
not typically include information about external entities such as
1031
open files.  Currently this method is not implemented in gdb.
1032
 
1033
A forked process can save the state of user memory and registers,
1034
as well as some subset of external (kernel) state.  This method
1035
is used to implement checkpoints on Linux, and in principle might
1036
be used on other systems.
1037
 
1038
Some targets, e.g.@: simulators, might have their own built-in
1039
method for saving checkpoints, and gdb might be able to take
1040
advantage of that capability without necessarily knowing any
1041
details of how it is done.
1042
 
1043
 
1044
@section Observing changes in @value{GDBN} internals
1045
@cindex observer pattern interface
1046
@cindex notifications about changes in internals
1047
 
1048
In order to function properly, several modules need to be notified when
1049
some changes occur in the @value{GDBN} internals.  Traditionally, these
1050
modules have relied on several paradigms, the most common ones being
1051
hooks and gdb-events.  Unfortunately, none of these paradigms was
1052
versatile enough to become the standard notification mechanism in
1053
@value{GDBN}.  The fact that they only supported one ``client'' was also
1054
a strong limitation.
1055
 
1056
A new paradigm, based on the Observer pattern of the @cite{Design
1057
Patterns} book, has therefore been implemented.  The goal was to provide
1058
a new interface overcoming the issues with the notification mechanisms
1059
previously available.  This new interface needed to be strongly typed,
1060
easy to extend, and versatile enough to be used as the standard
1061
interface when adding new notifications.
1062
 
1063
See @ref{GDB Observers} for a brief description of the observers
1064
currently implemented in GDB. The rationale for the current
1065
implementation is also briefly discussed.
1066
 
1067
@node User Interface
1068
 
1069
@chapter User Interface
1070
 
1071
@value{GDBN} has several user interfaces, of which the traditional
1072
command-line interface is perhaps the most familiar.
1073
 
1074
@section Command Interpreter
1075
 
1076
@cindex command interpreter
1077
@cindex CLI
1078
The command interpreter in @value{GDBN} is fairly simple.  It is designed to
1079
allow for the set of commands to be augmented dynamically, and also
1080
has a recursive subcommand capability, where the first argument to
1081
a command may itself direct a lookup on a different command list.
1082
 
1083
For instance, the @samp{set} command just starts a lookup on the
1084
@code{setlist} command list, while @samp{set thread} recurses
1085
to the @code{set_thread_cmd_list}.
1086
 
1087
@findex add_cmd
1088
@findex add_com
1089
To add commands in general, use @code{add_cmd}.  @code{add_com} adds to
1090
the main command list, and should be used for those commands.  The usual
1091
place to add commands is in the @code{_initialize_@var{xyz}} routines at
1092
the ends of most source files.
1093
 
1094
@findex add_setshow_cmd
1095
@findex add_setshow_cmd_full
1096
To add paired @samp{set} and @samp{show} commands, use
1097
@code{add_setshow_cmd} or @code{add_setshow_cmd_full}.  The former is
1098
a slightly simpler interface which is useful when you don't need to
1099
further modify the new command structures, while the latter returns
1100
the new command structures for manipulation.
1101
 
1102
@cindex deprecating commands
1103
@findex deprecate_cmd
1104
Before removing commands from the command set it is a good idea to
1105
deprecate them for some time.  Use @code{deprecate_cmd} on commands or
1106
aliases to set the deprecated flag.  @code{deprecate_cmd} takes a
1107
@code{struct cmd_list_element} as it's first argument.  You can use the
1108
return value from @code{add_com} or @code{add_cmd} to deprecate the
1109
command immediately after it is created.
1110
 
1111
The first time a command is used the user will be warned and offered a
1112
replacement (if one exists). Note that the replacement string passed to
1113
@code{deprecate_cmd} should be the full name of the command, i.e., the
1114
entire string the user should type at the command line.
1115
 
1116
@anchor{UI-Independent Output}
1117
@section UI-Independent Output---the @code{ui_out} Functions
1118
@c This section is based on the documentation written by Fernando
1119
@c Nasser <fnasser@redhat.com>.
1120
 
1121
@cindex @code{ui_out} functions
1122
The @code{ui_out} functions present an abstraction level for the
1123
@value{GDBN} output code.  They hide the specifics of different user
1124
interfaces supported by @value{GDBN}, and thus free the programmer
1125
from the need to write several versions of the same code, one each for
1126
every UI, to produce output.
1127
 
1128
@subsection Overview and Terminology
1129
 
1130
In general, execution of each @value{GDBN} command produces some sort
1131
of output, and can even generate an input request.
1132
 
1133
Output can be generated for the following purposes:
1134
 
1135
@itemize @bullet
1136
@item
1137
to display a @emph{result} of an operation;
1138
 
1139
@item
1140
to convey @emph{info} or produce side-effects of a requested
1141
operation;
1142
 
1143
@item
1144
to provide a @emph{notification} of an asynchronous event (including
1145
progress indication of a prolonged asynchronous operation);
1146
 
1147
@item
1148
to display @emph{error messages} (including warnings);
1149
 
1150
@item
1151
to show @emph{debug data};
1152
 
1153
@item
1154
to @emph{query} or prompt a user for input (a special case).
1155
@end itemize
1156
 
1157
@noindent
1158
This section mainly concentrates on how to build result output,
1159
although some of it also applies to other kinds of output.
1160
 
1161
Generation of output that displays the results of an operation
1162
involves one or more of the following:
1163
 
1164
@itemize @bullet
1165
@item
1166
output of the actual data
1167
 
1168
@item
1169
formatting the output as appropriate for console output, to make it
1170
easily readable by humans
1171
 
1172
@item
1173
machine oriented formatting--a more terse formatting to allow for easy
1174
parsing by programs which read @value{GDBN}'s output
1175
 
1176
@item
1177
annotation, whose purpose is to help legacy GUIs to identify interesting
1178
parts in the output
1179
@end itemize
1180
 
1181
The @code{ui_out} routines take care of the first three aspects.
1182
Annotations are provided by separate annotation routines.  Note that use
1183
of annotations for an interface between a GUI and @value{GDBN} is
1184
deprecated.
1185
 
1186
Output can be in the form of a single item, which we call a @dfn{field};
1187
a @dfn{list} consisting of identical fields; a @dfn{tuple} consisting of
1188
non-identical fields; or a @dfn{table}, which is a tuple consisting of a
1189
header and a body.  In a BNF-like form:
1190
 
1191
@table @code
1192
@item <table> @expansion{}
1193
@code{<header> <body>}
1194
@item <header> @expansion{}
1195
@code{@{ <column> @}}
1196
@item <column> @expansion{}
1197
@code{<width> <alignment> <title>}
1198
@item <body> @expansion{}
1199
@code{@{<row>@}}
1200
@end table
1201
 
1202
 
1203
@subsection General Conventions
1204
 
1205
Most @code{ui_out} routines are of type @code{void}, the exceptions are
1206
@code{ui_out_stream_new} (which returns a pointer to the newly created
1207
object) and the @code{make_cleanup} routines.
1208
 
1209
The first parameter is always the @code{ui_out} vector object, a pointer
1210
to a @code{struct ui_out}.
1211
 
1212
The @var{format} parameter is like in @code{printf} family of functions.
1213
When it is present, there must also be a variable list of arguments
1214
sufficient used to satisfy the @code{%} specifiers in the supplied
1215
format.
1216
 
1217
When a character string argument is not used in a @code{ui_out} function
1218
call, a @code{NULL} pointer has to be supplied instead.
1219
 
1220
 
1221
@subsection Table, Tuple and List Functions
1222
 
1223
@cindex list output functions
1224
@cindex table output functions
1225
@cindex tuple output functions
1226
This section introduces @code{ui_out} routines for building lists,
1227
tuples and tables.  The routines to output the actual data items
1228
(fields) are presented in the next section.
1229
 
1230
To recap: A @dfn{tuple} is a sequence of @dfn{fields}, each field
1231
containing information about an object; a @dfn{list} is a sequence of
1232
fields where each field describes an identical object.
1233
 
1234
Use the @dfn{table} functions when your output consists of a list of
1235
rows (tuples) and the console output should include a heading.  Use this
1236
even when you are listing just one object but you still want the header.
1237
 
1238
@cindex nesting level in @code{ui_out} functions
1239
Tables can not be nested.  Tuples and lists can be nested up to a
1240
maximum of five levels.
1241
 
1242
The overall structure of the table output code is something like this:
1243
 
1244
@smallexample
1245
  ui_out_table_begin
1246
    ui_out_table_header
1247
    @dots{}
1248
    ui_out_table_body
1249
      ui_out_tuple_begin
1250
        ui_out_field_*
1251
        @dots{}
1252
      ui_out_tuple_end
1253
      @dots{}
1254
  ui_out_table_end
1255
@end smallexample
1256
 
1257
Here is the description of table-, tuple- and list-related @code{ui_out}
1258
functions:
1259
 
1260
@deftypefun void ui_out_table_begin (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{nbrofcols}, int @var{nr_rows}, const char *@var{tblid})
1261
The function @code{ui_out_table_begin} marks the beginning of the output
1262
of a table.  It should always be called before any other @code{ui_out}
1263
function for a given table.  @var{nbrofcols} is the number of columns in
1264
the table. @var{nr_rows} is the number of rows in the table.
1265
@var{tblid} is an optional string identifying the table.  The string
1266
pointed to by @var{tblid} is copied by the implementation of
1267
@code{ui_out_table_begin}, so the application can free the string if it
1268
was @code{malloc}ed.
1269
 
1270
The companion function @code{ui_out_table_end}, described below, marks
1271
the end of the table's output.
1272
@end deftypefun
1273
 
1274
@deftypefun void ui_out_table_header (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{width}, enum ui_align @var{alignment}, const char *@var{colhdr})
1275
@code{ui_out_table_header} provides the header information for a single
1276
table column.  You call this function several times, one each for every
1277
column of the table, after @code{ui_out_table_begin}, but before
1278
@code{ui_out_table_body}.
1279
 
1280
The value of @var{width} gives the column width in characters.  The
1281
value of @var{alignment} is one of @code{left}, @code{center}, and
1282
@code{right}, and it specifies how to align the header: left-justify,
1283
center, or right-justify it.  @var{colhdr} points to a string that
1284
specifies the column header; the implementation copies that string, so
1285
column header strings in @code{malloc}ed storage can be freed after the
1286
call.
1287
@end deftypefun
1288
 
1289
@deftypefun void ui_out_table_body (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1290
This function delimits the table header from the table body.
1291
@end deftypefun
1292
 
1293
@deftypefun void ui_out_table_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1294
This function signals the end of a table's output.  It should be called
1295
after the table body has been produced by the list and field output
1296
functions.
1297
 
1298
There should be exactly one call to @code{ui_out_table_end} for each
1299
call to @code{ui_out_table_begin}, otherwise the @code{ui_out} functions
1300
will signal an internal error.
1301
@end deftypefun
1302
 
1303
The output of the tuples that represent the table rows must follow the
1304
call to @code{ui_out_table_body} and precede the call to
1305
@code{ui_out_table_end}.  You build a tuple by calling
1306
@code{ui_out_tuple_begin} and @code{ui_out_tuple_end}, with suitable
1307
calls to functions which actually output fields between them.
1308
 
1309
@deftypefun void ui_out_tuple_begin (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1310
This function marks the beginning of a tuple output.  @var{id} points
1311
to an optional string that identifies the tuple; it is copied by the
1312
implementation, and so strings in @code{malloc}ed storage can be freed
1313
after the call.
1314
@end deftypefun
1315
 
1316
@deftypefun void ui_out_tuple_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1317
This function signals an end of a tuple output.  There should be exactly
1318
one call to @code{ui_out_tuple_end} for each call to
1319
@code{ui_out_tuple_begin}, otherwise an internal @value{GDBN} error will
1320
be signaled.
1321
@end deftypefun
1322
 
1323
@deftypefun {struct cleanup *} make_cleanup_ui_out_tuple_begin_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1324
This function first opens the tuple and then establishes a cleanup
1325
(@pxref{Coding, Cleanups}) to close the tuple.  It provides a convenient
1326
and correct implementation of the non-portable@footnote{The function
1327
cast is not portable ISO C.} code sequence:
1328
@smallexample
1329
struct cleanup *old_cleanup;
1330
ui_out_tuple_begin (uiout, "...");
1331
old_cleanup = make_cleanup ((void(*)(void *)) ui_out_tuple_end,
1332
                            uiout);
1333
@end smallexample
1334
@end deftypefun
1335
 
1336
@deftypefun void ui_out_list_begin (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1337
This function marks the beginning of a list output.  @var{id} points to
1338
an optional string that identifies the list; it is copied by the
1339
implementation, and so strings in @code{malloc}ed storage can be freed
1340
after the call.
1341
@end deftypefun
1342
 
1343
@deftypefun void ui_out_list_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1344
This function signals an end of a list output.  There should be exactly
1345
one call to @code{ui_out_list_end} for each call to
1346
@code{ui_out_list_begin}, otherwise an internal @value{GDBN} error will
1347
be signaled.
1348
@end deftypefun
1349
 
1350
@deftypefun {struct cleanup *} make_cleanup_ui_out_list_begin_end (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{id})
1351
Similar to @code{make_cleanup_ui_out_tuple_begin_end}, this function
1352
opens a list and then establishes cleanup (@pxref{Coding, Cleanups})
1353
that will close the list.
1354
@end deftypefun
1355
 
1356
@subsection Item Output Functions
1357
 
1358
@cindex item output functions
1359
@cindex field output functions
1360
@cindex data output
1361
The functions described below produce output for the actual data
1362
items, or fields, which contain information about the object.
1363
 
1364
Choose the appropriate function accordingly to your particular needs.
1365
 
1366
@deftypefun void ui_out_field_fmt (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, char *@var{fldname}, char *@var{format}, ...)
1367
This is the most general output function.  It produces the
1368
representation of the data in the variable-length argument list
1369
according to formatting specifications in @var{format}, a
1370
@code{printf}-like format string.  The optional argument @var{fldname}
1371
supplies the name of the field.  The data items themselves are
1372
supplied as additional arguments after @var{format}.
1373
 
1374
This generic function should be used only when it is not possible to
1375
use one of the specialized versions (see below).
1376
@end deftypefun
1377
 
1378
@deftypefun void ui_out_field_int (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname}, int @var{value})
1379
This function outputs a value of an @code{int} variable.  It uses the
1380
@code{"%d"} output conversion specification.  @var{fldname} specifies
1381
the name of the field.
1382
@end deftypefun
1383
 
1384
@deftypefun void ui_out_field_fmt_int (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{width}, enum ui_align @var{alignment}, const char *@var{fldname}, int @var{value})
1385
This function outputs a value of an @code{int} variable.  It differs from
1386
@code{ui_out_field_int} in that the caller specifies the desired @var{width} and @var{alignment} of the output.
1387
@var{fldname} specifies
1388
the name of the field.
1389
@end deftypefun
1390
 
1391
@deftypefun void ui_out_field_core_addr (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname}, struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, CORE_ADDR @var{address})
1392
This function outputs an address as appropriate for @var{gdbarch}.
1393
@end deftypefun
1394
 
1395
@deftypefun void ui_out_field_string (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname}, const char *@var{string})
1396
This function outputs a string using the @code{"%s"} conversion
1397
specification.
1398
@end deftypefun
1399
 
1400
Sometimes, there's a need to compose your output piece by piece using
1401
functions that operate on a stream, such as @code{value_print} or
1402
@code{fprintf_symbol_filtered}.  These functions accept an argument of
1403
the type @code{struct ui_file *}, a pointer to a @code{ui_file} object
1404
used to store the data stream used for the output.  When you use one
1405
of these functions, you need a way to pass their results stored in a
1406
@code{ui_file} object to the @code{ui_out} functions.  To this end,
1407
you first create a @code{ui_stream} object by calling
1408
@code{ui_out_stream_new}, pass the @code{stream} member of that
1409
@code{ui_stream} object to @code{value_print} and similar functions,
1410
and finally call @code{ui_out_field_stream} to output the field you
1411
constructed.  When the @code{ui_stream} object is no longer needed,
1412
you should destroy it and free its memory by calling
1413
@code{ui_out_stream_delete}.
1414
 
1415
@deftypefun {struct ui_stream *} ui_out_stream_new (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1416
This function creates a new @code{ui_stream} object which uses the
1417
same output methods as the @code{ui_out} object whose pointer is
1418
passed in @var{uiout}.  It returns a pointer to the newly created
1419
@code{ui_stream} object.
1420
@end deftypefun
1421
 
1422
@deftypefun void ui_out_stream_delete (struct ui_stream *@var{streambuf})
1423
This functions destroys a @code{ui_stream} object specified by
1424
@var{streambuf}.
1425
@end deftypefun
1426
 
1427
@deftypefun void ui_out_field_stream (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fieldname}, struct ui_stream *@var{streambuf})
1428
This function consumes all the data accumulated in
1429
@code{streambuf->stream} and outputs it like
1430
@code{ui_out_field_string} does.  After a call to
1431
@code{ui_out_field_stream}, the accumulated data no longer exists, but
1432
the stream is still valid and may be used for producing more fields.
1433
@end deftypefun
1434
 
1435
@strong{Important:} If there is any chance that your code could bail
1436
out before completing output generation and reaching the point where
1437
@code{ui_out_stream_delete} is called, it is necessary to set up a
1438
cleanup, to avoid leaking memory and other resources.  Here's a
1439
skeleton code to do that:
1440
 
1441
@smallexample
1442
 struct ui_stream *mybuf = ui_out_stream_new (uiout);
1443
 struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (ui_out_stream_delete, mybuf);
1444
 ...
1445
 do_cleanups (old);
1446
@end smallexample
1447
 
1448
If the function already has the old cleanup chain set (for other kinds
1449
of cleanups), you just have to add your cleanup to it:
1450
 
1451
@smallexample
1452
  mybuf = ui_out_stream_new (uiout);
1453
  make_cleanup (ui_out_stream_delete, mybuf);
1454
@end smallexample
1455
 
1456
Note that with cleanups in place, you should not call
1457
@code{ui_out_stream_delete} directly, or you would attempt to free the
1458
same buffer twice.
1459
 
1460
@subsection Utility Output Functions
1461
 
1462
@deftypefun void ui_out_field_skip (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{fldname})
1463
This function skips a field in a table.  Use it if you have to leave
1464
an empty field without disrupting the table alignment.  The argument
1465
@var{fldname} specifies a name for the (missing) filed.
1466
@end deftypefun
1467
 
1468
@deftypefun void ui_out_text (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, const char *@var{string})
1469
This function outputs the text in @var{string} in a way that makes it
1470
easy to be read by humans.  For example, the console implementation of
1471
this method filters the text through a built-in pager, to prevent it
1472
from scrolling off the visible portion of the screen.
1473
 
1474
Use this function for printing relatively long chunks of text around
1475
the actual field data: the text it produces is not aligned according
1476
to the table's format.  Use @code{ui_out_field_string} to output a
1477
string field, and use @code{ui_out_message}, described below, to
1478
output short messages.
1479
@end deftypefun
1480
 
1481
@deftypefun void ui_out_spaces (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{nspaces})
1482
This function outputs @var{nspaces} spaces.  It is handy to align the
1483
text produced by @code{ui_out_text} with the rest of the table or
1484
list.
1485
@end deftypefun
1486
 
1487
@deftypefun void ui_out_message (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, int @var{verbosity}, const char *@var{format}, ...)
1488
This function produces a formatted message, provided that the current
1489
verbosity level is at least as large as given by @var{verbosity}.  The
1490
current verbosity level is specified by the user with the @samp{set
1491
verbositylevel} command.@footnote{As of this writing (April 2001),
1492
setting verbosity level is not yet implemented, and is always returned
1493
as zero.  So calling @code{ui_out_message} with a @var{verbosity}
1494
argument more than zero will cause the message to never be printed.}
1495
@end deftypefun
1496
 
1497
@deftypefun void ui_out_wrap_hint (struct ui_out *@var{uiout}, char *@var{indent})
1498
This function gives the console output filter (a paging filter) a hint
1499
of where to break lines which are too long.  Ignored for all other
1500
output consumers.  @var{indent}, if non-@code{NULL}, is the string to
1501
be printed to indent the wrapped text on the next line; it must remain
1502
accessible until the next call to @code{ui_out_wrap_hint}, or until an
1503
explicit newline is produced by one of the other functions.  If
1504
@var{indent} is @code{NULL}, the wrapped text will not be indented.
1505
@end deftypefun
1506
 
1507
@deftypefun void ui_out_flush (struct ui_out *@var{uiout})
1508
This function flushes whatever output has been accumulated so far, if
1509
the UI buffers output.
1510
@end deftypefun
1511
 
1512
 
1513
@subsection Examples of Use of @code{ui_out} functions
1514
 
1515
@cindex using @code{ui_out} functions
1516
@cindex @code{ui_out} functions, usage examples
1517
This section gives some practical examples of using the @code{ui_out}
1518
functions to generalize the old console-oriented code in
1519
@value{GDBN}.  The examples all come from functions defined on the
1520
@file{breakpoints.c} file.
1521
 
1522
This example, from the @code{breakpoint_1} function, shows how to
1523
produce a table.
1524
 
1525
The original code was:
1526
 
1527
@smallexample
1528
 if (!found_a_breakpoint++)
1529
   @{
1530
     annotate_breakpoints_headers ();
1531
 
1532
     annotate_field (0);
1533
     printf_filtered ("Num ");
1534
     annotate_field (1);
1535
     printf_filtered ("Type           ");
1536
     annotate_field (2);
1537
     printf_filtered ("Disp ");
1538
     annotate_field (3);
1539
     printf_filtered ("Enb ");
1540
     if (addressprint)
1541
       @{
1542
         annotate_field (4);
1543
         printf_filtered ("Address    ");
1544
       @}
1545
     annotate_field (5);
1546
     printf_filtered ("What\n");
1547
 
1548
     annotate_breakpoints_table ();
1549
   @}
1550
@end smallexample
1551
 
1552
Here's the new version:
1553
 
1554
@smallexample
1555
  nr_printable_breakpoints = @dots{};
1556
 
1557
  if (addressprint)
1558
    ui_out_table_begin (ui, 6, nr_printable_breakpoints, "BreakpointTable");
1559
  else
1560
    ui_out_table_begin (ui, 5, nr_printable_breakpoints, "BreakpointTable");
1561
 
1562
  if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1563
    annotate_breakpoints_headers ();
1564
  if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1565
    annotate_field (0);
1566
  ui_out_table_header (uiout, 3, ui_left, "number", "Num");             /* 1 */
1567
  if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1568
    annotate_field (1);
1569
  ui_out_table_header (uiout, 14, ui_left, "type", "Type");             /* 2 */
1570
  if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1571
    annotate_field (2);
1572
  ui_out_table_header (uiout, 4, ui_left, "disp", "Disp");              /* 3 */
1573
  if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1574
    annotate_field (3);
1575
  ui_out_table_header (uiout, 3, ui_left, "enabled", "Enb");    /* 4 */
1576
  if (addressprint)
1577
    @{
1578
     if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1579
       annotate_field (4);
1580
     if (print_address_bits <= 32)
1581
       ui_out_table_header (uiout, 10, ui_left, "addr", "Address");/* 5 */
1582
     else
1583
       ui_out_table_header (uiout, 18, ui_left, "addr", "Address");/* 5 */
1584
    @}
1585
  if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1586
    annotate_field (5);
1587
  ui_out_table_header (uiout, 40, ui_noalign, "what", "What");  /* 6 */
1588
  ui_out_table_body (uiout);
1589
  if (nr_printable_breakpoints > 0)
1590
    annotate_breakpoints_table ();
1591
@end smallexample
1592
 
1593
This example, from the @code{print_one_breakpoint} function, shows how
1594
to produce the actual data for the table whose structure was defined
1595
in the above example.  The original code was:
1596
 
1597
@smallexample
1598
   annotate_record ();
1599
   annotate_field (0);
1600
   printf_filtered ("%-3d ", b->number);
1601
   annotate_field (1);
1602
   if ((int)b->type > (sizeof(bptypes)/sizeof(bptypes[0]))
1603
       || ((int) b->type != bptypes[(int) b->type].type))
1604
     internal_error ("bptypes table does not describe type #%d.",
1605
                     (int)b->type);
1606
   printf_filtered ("%-14s ", bptypes[(int)b->type].description);
1607
   annotate_field (2);
1608
   printf_filtered ("%-4s ", bpdisps[(int)b->disposition]);
1609
   annotate_field (3);
1610
   printf_filtered ("%-3c ", bpenables[(int)b->enable]);
1611
   @dots{}
1612
@end smallexample
1613
 
1614
This is the new version:
1615
 
1616
@smallexample
1617
   annotate_record ();
1618
   ui_out_tuple_begin (uiout, "bkpt");
1619
   annotate_field (0);
1620
   ui_out_field_int (uiout, "number", b->number);
1621
   annotate_field (1);
1622
   if (((int) b->type > (sizeof (bptypes) / sizeof (bptypes[0])))
1623
       || ((int) b->type != bptypes[(int) b->type].type))
1624
     internal_error ("bptypes table does not describe type #%d.",
1625
                     (int) b->type);
1626
   ui_out_field_string (uiout, "type", bptypes[(int)b->type].description);
1627
   annotate_field (2);
1628
   ui_out_field_string (uiout, "disp", bpdisps[(int)b->disposition]);
1629
   annotate_field (3);
1630
   ui_out_field_fmt (uiout, "enabled", "%c", bpenables[(int)b->enable]);
1631
   @dots{}
1632
@end smallexample
1633
 
1634
This example, also from @code{print_one_breakpoint}, shows how to
1635
produce a complicated output field using the @code{print_expression}
1636
functions which requires a stream to be passed.  It also shows how to
1637
automate stream destruction with cleanups.  The original code was:
1638
 
1639
@smallexample
1640
    annotate_field (5);
1641
    print_expression (b->exp, gdb_stdout);
1642
@end smallexample
1643
 
1644
The new version is:
1645
 
1646
@smallexample
1647
  struct ui_stream *stb = ui_out_stream_new (uiout);
1648
  struct cleanup *old_chain = make_cleanup_ui_out_stream_delete (stb);
1649
  ...
1650
  annotate_field (5);
1651
  print_expression (b->exp, stb->stream);
1652
  ui_out_field_stream (uiout, "what", local_stream);
1653
@end smallexample
1654
 
1655
This example, also from @code{print_one_breakpoint}, shows how to use
1656
@code{ui_out_text} and @code{ui_out_field_string}.  The original code
1657
was:
1658
 
1659
@smallexample
1660
  annotate_field (5);
1661
  if (b->dll_pathname == NULL)
1662
    printf_filtered ("<any library> ");
1663
  else
1664
    printf_filtered ("library \"%s\" ", b->dll_pathname);
1665
@end smallexample
1666
 
1667
It became:
1668
 
1669
@smallexample
1670
  annotate_field (5);
1671
  if (b->dll_pathname == NULL)
1672
    @{
1673
      ui_out_field_string (uiout, "what", "<any library>");
1674
      ui_out_spaces (uiout, 1);
1675
    @}
1676
  else
1677
    @{
1678
      ui_out_text (uiout, "library \"");
1679
      ui_out_field_string (uiout, "what", b->dll_pathname);
1680
      ui_out_text (uiout, "\" ");
1681
    @}
1682
@end smallexample
1683
 
1684
The following example from @code{print_one_breakpoint} shows how to
1685
use @code{ui_out_field_int} and @code{ui_out_spaces}.  The original
1686
code was:
1687
 
1688
@smallexample
1689
  annotate_field (5);
1690
  if (b->forked_inferior_pid != 0)
1691
    printf_filtered ("process %d ", b->forked_inferior_pid);
1692
@end smallexample
1693
 
1694
It became:
1695
 
1696
@smallexample
1697
  annotate_field (5);
1698
  if (b->forked_inferior_pid != 0)
1699
    @{
1700
      ui_out_text (uiout, "process ");
1701
      ui_out_field_int (uiout, "what", b->forked_inferior_pid);
1702
      ui_out_spaces (uiout, 1);
1703
    @}
1704
@end smallexample
1705
 
1706
Here's an example of using @code{ui_out_field_string}.  The original
1707
code was:
1708
 
1709
@smallexample
1710
  annotate_field (5);
1711
  if (b->exec_pathname != NULL)
1712
    printf_filtered ("program \"%s\" ", b->exec_pathname);
1713
@end smallexample
1714
 
1715
It became:
1716
 
1717
@smallexample
1718
  annotate_field (5);
1719
  if (b->exec_pathname != NULL)
1720
    @{
1721
      ui_out_text (uiout, "program \"");
1722
      ui_out_field_string (uiout, "what", b->exec_pathname);
1723
      ui_out_text (uiout, "\" ");
1724
    @}
1725
@end smallexample
1726
 
1727
Finally, here's an example of printing an address.  The original code:
1728
 
1729
@smallexample
1730
  annotate_field (4);
1731
  printf_filtered ("%s ",
1732
        hex_string_custom ((unsigned long) b->address, 8));
1733
@end smallexample
1734
 
1735
It became:
1736
 
1737
@smallexample
1738
  annotate_field (4);
1739
  ui_out_field_core_addr (uiout, "Address", b->address);
1740
@end smallexample
1741
 
1742
 
1743
@section Console Printing
1744
 
1745
@section TUI
1746
 
1747
@node libgdb
1748
 
1749
@chapter libgdb
1750
 
1751
@section libgdb 1.0
1752
@cindex @code{libgdb}
1753
@code{libgdb} 1.0 was an abortive project of years ago.  The theory was
1754
to provide an API to @value{GDBN}'s functionality.
1755
 
1756
@section libgdb 2.0
1757
@cindex @code{libgdb}
1758
@code{libgdb} 2.0 is an ongoing effort to update @value{GDBN} so that is
1759
better able to support graphical and other environments.
1760
 
1761
Since @code{libgdb} development is on-going, its architecture is still
1762
evolving.  The following components have so far been identified:
1763
 
1764
@itemize @bullet
1765
@item
1766
Observer - @file{gdb-events.h}.
1767
@item
1768
Builder - @file{ui-out.h}
1769
@item
1770
Event Loop - @file{event-loop.h}
1771
@item
1772
Library - @file{gdb.h}
1773
@end itemize
1774
 
1775
The model that ties these components together is described below.
1776
 
1777
@section The @code{libgdb} Model
1778
 
1779
A client of @code{libgdb} interacts with the library in two ways.
1780
 
1781
@itemize @bullet
1782
@item
1783
As an observer (using @file{gdb-events}) receiving notifications from
1784
@code{libgdb} of any internal state changes (break point changes, run
1785
state, etc).
1786
@item
1787
As a client querying @code{libgdb} (using the @file{ui-out} builder) to
1788
obtain various status values from @value{GDBN}.
1789
@end itemize
1790
 
1791
Since @code{libgdb} could have multiple clients (e.g., a GUI supporting
1792
the existing @value{GDBN} CLI), those clients must co-operate when
1793
controlling @code{libgdb}.  In particular, a client must ensure that
1794
@code{libgdb} is idle (i.e.@: no other client is using @code{libgdb})
1795
before responding to a @file{gdb-event} by making a query.
1796
 
1797
@section CLI support
1798
 
1799
At present @value{GDBN}'s CLI is very much entangled in with the core of
1800
@code{libgdb}.  Consequently, a client wishing to include the CLI in
1801
their interface needs to carefully co-ordinate its own and the CLI's
1802
requirements.
1803
 
1804
It is suggested that the client set @code{libgdb} up to be bi-modal
1805
(alternate between CLI and client query modes).  The notes below sketch
1806
out the theory:
1807
 
1808
@itemize @bullet
1809
@item
1810
The client registers itself as an observer of @code{libgdb}.
1811
@item
1812
The client create and install @code{cli-out} builder using its own
1813
versions of the @code{ui-file} @code{gdb_stderr}, @code{gdb_stdtarg} and
1814
@code{gdb_stdout} streams.
1815
@item
1816
The client creates a separate custom @code{ui-out} builder that is only
1817
used while making direct queries to @code{libgdb}.
1818
@end itemize
1819
 
1820
When the client receives input intended for the CLI, it simply passes it
1821
along.  Since the @code{cli-out} builder is installed by default, all
1822
the CLI output in response to that command is routed (pronounced rooted)
1823
through to the client controlled @code{gdb_stdout} et.@: al.@: streams.
1824
At the same time, the client is kept abreast of internal changes by
1825
virtue of being a @code{libgdb} observer.
1826
 
1827
The only restriction on the client is that it must wait until
1828
@code{libgdb} becomes idle before initiating any queries (using the
1829
client's custom builder).
1830
 
1831
@section @code{libgdb} components
1832
 
1833
@subheading Observer - @file{gdb-events.h}
1834
@file{gdb-events} provides the client with a very raw mechanism that can
1835
be used to implement an observer.  At present it only allows for one
1836
observer and that observer must, internally, handle the need to delay
1837
the processing of any event notifications until after @code{libgdb} has
1838
finished the current command.
1839
 
1840
@subheading Builder - @file{ui-out.h}
1841
@file{ui-out} provides the infrastructure necessary for a client to
1842
create a builder.  That builder is then passed down to @code{libgdb}
1843
when doing any queries.
1844
 
1845
@subheading Event Loop - @file{event-loop.h}
1846
@c There could be an entire section on the event-loop
1847
@file{event-loop}, currently non-re-entrant, provides a simple event
1848
loop.  A client would need to either plug its self into this loop or,
1849
implement a new event-loop that @value{GDBN} would use.
1850
 
1851
The event-loop will eventually be made re-entrant.  This is so that
1852
@value{GDBN} can better handle the problem of some commands blocking
1853
instead of returning.
1854
 
1855
@subheading Library - @file{gdb.h}
1856
@file{libgdb} is the most obvious component of this system.  It provides
1857
the query interface.  Each function is parameterized by a @code{ui-out}
1858
builder.  The result of the query is constructed using that builder
1859
before the query function returns.
1860
 
1861
@node Values
1862
@chapter Values
1863
@section Values
1864
 
1865
@cindex values
1866
@cindex @code{value} structure
1867
@value{GDBN} uses @code{struct value}, or @dfn{values}, as an internal
1868
abstraction for the representation of a variety of inferior objects
1869
and @value{GDBN} convenience objects.
1870
 
1871
Values have an associated @code{struct type}, that describes a virtual
1872
view of the raw data or object stored in or accessed through the
1873
value.
1874
 
1875
A value is in addition discriminated by its lvalue-ness, given its
1876
@code{enum lval_type} enumeration type:
1877
 
1878
@cindex @code{lval_type} enumeration, for values.
1879
@table @code
1880
@item @code{not_lval}
1881
This value is not an lval.  It can't be assigned to.
1882
 
1883
@item @code{lval_memory}
1884
This value represents an object in memory.
1885
 
1886
@item @code{lval_register}
1887
This value represents an object that lives in a register.
1888
 
1889
@item @code{lval_internalvar}
1890
Represents the value of an internal variable.
1891
 
1892
@item @code{lval_internalvar_component}
1893
Represents part of a @value{GDBN} internal variable.  E.g., a
1894
structure field.
1895
 
1896
@cindex computed values
1897
@item @code{lval_computed}
1898
These are ``computed'' values.  They allow creating specialized value
1899
objects for specific purposes, all abstracted away from the core value
1900
support code.  The creator of such a value writes specialized
1901
functions to handle the reading and writing to/from the value's
1902
backend data, and optionally, a ``copy operator'' and a
1903
``destructor''.
1904
 
1905
Pointers to these functions are stored in a @code{struct lval_funcs}
1906
instance (declared in @file{value.h}), and passed to the
1907
@code{allocate_computed_value} function, as in the example below.
1908
 
1909
@smallexample
1910
static void
1911
nil_value_read (struct value *v)
1912
@{
1913
  /* This callback reads data from some backend, and stores it in V.
1914
     In this case, we always read null data.  You'll want to fill in
1915
     something more interesting.  */
1916
 
1917
  memset (value_contents_all_raw (v),
1918
          value_offset (v),
1919
          TYPE_LENGTH (value_type (v)));
1920
@}
1921
 
1922
static void
1923
nil_value_write (struct value *v, struct value *fromval)
1924
@{
1925
  /* Takes the data from FROMVAL and stores it in the backend of V.  */
1926
 
1927
  to_oblivion (value_contents_all_raw (fromval),
1928
               value_offset (v),
1929
               TYPE_LENGTH (value_type (fromval)));
1930
@}
1931
 
1932
static struct lval_funcs nil_value_funcs =
1933
  @{
1934
    nil_value_read,
1935
    nil_value_write
1936
  @};
1937
 
1938
struct value *
1939
make_nil_value (void)
1940
@{
1941
   struct type *type;
1942
   struct value *v;
1943
 
1944
   type = make_nils_type ();
1945
   v = allocate_computed_value (type, &nil_value_funcs, NULL);
1946
 
1947
   return v;
1948
@}
1949
@end smallexample
1950
 
1951
See the implementation of the @code{$_siginfo} convenience variable in
1952
@file{infrun.c} as a real example use of lval_computed.
1953
 
1954
@end table
1955
 
1956
@node Stack Frames
1957
@chapter Stack Frames
1958
 
1959
@cindex frame
1960
@cindex call stack frame
1961
A frame is a construct that @value{GDBN} uses to keep track of calling
1962
and called functions.
1963
 
1964
@cindex unwind frame
1965
@value{GDBN}'s frame model, a fresh design, was implemented with the
1966
need to support @sc{dwarf}'s Call Frame Information in mind.  In fact,
1967
the term ``unwind'' is taken directly from that specification.
1968
Developers wishing to learn more about unwinders, are encouraged to
1969
read the @sc{dwarf} specification, available from
1970
@url{http://www.dwarfstd.org}.
1971
 
1972
@findex frame_register_unwind
1973
@findex get_frame_register
1974
@value{GDBN}'s model is that you find a frame's registers by
1975
``unwinding'' them from the next younger frame.  That is,
1976
@samp{get_frame_register} which returns the value of a register in
1977
frame #1 (the next-to-youngest frame), is implemented by calling frame
1978
#0's @code{frame_register_unwind} (the youngest frame).  But then the
1979
obvious question is: how do you access the registers of the youngest
1980
frame itself?
1981
 
1982
@cindex sentinel frame
1983
@findex get_frame_type
1984
@vindex SENTINEL_FRAME
1985
To answer this question, @value{GDBN} has the @dfn{sentinel} frame, the
1986
``-1st'' frame.  Unwinding registers from the sentinel frame gives you
1987
the current values of the youngest real frame's registers.  If @var{f}
1988
is a sentinel frame, then @code{get_frame_type (@var{f}) @equiv{}
1989
SENTINEL_FRAME}.
1990
 
1991
@section Selecting an Unwinder
1992
 
1993
@findex frame_unwind_prepend_unwinder
1994
@findex frame_unwind_append_unwinder
1995
The architecture registers a list of frame unwinders (@code{struct
1996
frame_unwind}), using the functions
1997
@code{frame_unwind_prepend_unwinder} and
1998
@code{frame_unwind_append_unwinder}.  Each unwinder includes a
1999
sniffer.  Whenever @value{GDBN} needs to unwind a frame (to fetch the
2000
previous frame's registers or the current frame's ID), it calls
2001
registered sniffers in order to find one which recognizes the frame.
2002
The first time a sniffer returns non-zero, the corresponding unwinder
2003
is assigned to the frame.
2004
 
2005
@section Unwinding the Frame ID
2006
@cindex frame ID
2007
 
2008
Every frame has an associated ID, of type @code{struct frame_id}.
2009
The ID includes the stack base and function start address for
2010
the frame.  The ID persists through the entire life of the frame,
2011
including while other called frames are running; it is used to
2012
locate an appropriate @code{struct frame_info} from the cache.
2013
 
2014
Every time the inferior stops, and at various other times, the frame
2015
cache is flushed.  Because of this, parts of @value{GDBN} which need
2016
to keep track of individual frames cannot use pointers to @code{struct
2017
frame_info}.  A frame ID provides a stable reference to a frame, even
2018
when the unwinder must be run again to generate a new @code{struct
2019
frame_info} for the same frame.
2020
 
2021
The frame's unwinder's @code{this_id} method is called to find the ID.
2022
Note that this is different from register unwinding, where the next
2023
frame's @code{prev_register} is called to unwind this frame's
2024
registers.
2025
 
2026
Both stack base and function address are required to identify the
2027
frame, because a recursive function has the same function address for
2028
two consecutive frames and a leaf function may have the same stack
2029
address as its caller.  On some platforms, a third address is part of
2030
the ID to further disambiguate frames---for instance, on IA-64
2031
the separate register stack address is included in the ID.
2032
 
2033
An invalid frame ID (@code{outer_frame_id}) returned from the
2034
@code{this_id} method means to stop unwinding after this frame.
2035
 
2036
@code{null_frame_id} is another invalid frame ID which should be used
2037
when there is no frame.  For instance, certain breakpoints are attached
2038
to a specific frame, and that frame is identified through its frame ID
2039
(we use this to implement the "finish" command).  Using
2040
@code{null_frame_id} as the frame ID for a given breakpoint means
2041
that the breakpoint is not specific to any frame.  The @code{this_id}
2042
method should never return @code{null_frame_id}.
2043
 
2044
@section Unwinding Registers
2045
 
2046
Each unwinder includes a @code{prev_register} method.  This method
2047
takes a frame, an associated cache pointer, and a register number.
2048
It returns a @code{struct value *} describing the requested register,
2049
as saved by this frame.  This is the value of the register that is
2050
current in this frame's caller.
2051
 
2052
The returned value must have the same type as the register.  It may
2053
have any lvalue type.  In most circumstances one of these routines
2054
will generate the appropriate value:
2055
 
2056
@table @code
2057
@item frame_unwind_got_optimized
2058
@findex frame_unwind_got_optimized
2059
This register was not saved.
2060
 
2061
@item frame_unwind_got_register
2062
@findex frame_unwind_got_register
2063
This register was copied into another register in this frame.  This
2064
is also used for unchanged registers; they are ``copied'' into the
2065
same register.
2066
 
2067
@item frame_unwind_got_memory
2068
@findex frame_unwind_got_memory
2069
This register was saved in memory.
2070
 
2071
@item frame_unwind_got_constant
2072
@findex frame_unwind_got_constant
2073
This register was not saved, but the unwinder can compute the previous
2074
value some other way.
2075
 
2076
@item frame_unwind_got_address
2077
@findex frame_unwind_got_address
2078
Same as @code{frame_unwind_got_constant}, except that the value is a target
2079
address.  This is frequently used for the stack pointer, which is not
2080
explicitly saved but has a known offset from this frame's stack
2081
pointer.  For architectures with a flat unified address space, this is
2082
generally the same as @code{frame_unwind_got_constant}.
2083
@end table
2084
 
2085
@node Symbol Handling
2086
 
2087
@chapter Symbol Handling
2088
 
2089
Symbols are a key part of @value{GDBN}'s operation.  Symbols include
2090
variables, functions, and types.
2091
 
2092
Symbol information for a large program can be truly massive, and
2093
reading of symbol information is one of the major performance
2094
bottlenecks in @value{GDBN}; it can take many minutes to process it
2095
all.  Studies have shown that nearly all the time spent is
2096
computational, rather than file reading.
2097
 
2098
One of the ways for @value{GDBN} to provide a good user experience is
2099
to start up quickly, taking no more than a few seconds.  It is simply
2100
not possible to process all of a program's debugging info in that
2101
time, and so we attempt to handle symbols incrementally.  For instance,
2102
we create @dfn{partial symbol tables} consisting of only selected
2103
symbols, and only expand them to full symbol tables when necessary.
2104
 
2105
@section Symbol Reading
2106
 
2107
@cindex symbol reading
2108
@cindex reading of symbols
2109
@cindex symbol files
2110
@value{GDBN} reads symbols from @dfn{symbol files}.  The usual symbol
2111
file is the file containing the program which @value{GDBN} is
2112
debugging.  @value{GDBN} can be directed to use a different file for
2113
symbols (with the @samp{symbol-file} command), and it can also read
2114
more symbols via the @samp{add-file} and @samp{load} commands. In
2115
addition, it may bring in more symbols while loading shared
2116
libraries.
2117
 
2118
@findex find_sym_fns
2119
Symbol files are initially opened by code in @file{symfile.c} using
2120
the BFD library (@pxref{Support Libraries}).  BFD identifies the type
2121
of the file by examining its header.  @code{find_sym_fns} then uses
2122
this identification to locate a set of symbol-reading functions.
2123
 
2124
@findex add_symtab_fns
2125
@cindex @code{sym_fns} structure
2126
@cindex adding a symbol-reading module
2127
Symbol-reading modules identify themselves to @value{GDBN} by calling
2128
@code{add_symtab_fns} during their module initialization.  The argument
2129
to @code{add_symtab_fns} is a @code{struct sym_fns} which contains the
2130
name (or name prefix) of the symbol format, the length of the prefix,
2131
and pointers to four functions.  These functions are called at various
2132
times to process symbol files whose identification matches the specified
2133
prefix.
2134
 
2135
The functions supplied by each module are:
2136
 
2137
@table @code
2138
@item @var{xyz}_symfile_init(struct sym_fns *sf)
2139
 
2140
@cindex secondary symbol file
2141
Called from @code{symbol_file_add} when we are about to read a new
2142
symbol file.  This function should clean up any internal state (possibly
2143
resulting from half-read previous files, for example) and prepare to
2144
read a new symbol file.  Note that the symbol file which we are reading
2145
might be a new ``main'' symbol file, or might be a secondary symbol file
2146
whose symbols are being added to the existing symbol table.
2147
 
2148
The argument to @code{@var{xyz}_symfile_init} is a newly allocated
2149
@code{struct sym_fns} whose @code{bfd} field contains the BFD for the
2150
new symbol file being read.  Its @code{private} field has been zeroed,
2151
and can be modified as desired.  Typically, a struct of private
2152
information will be @code{malloc}'d, and a pointer to it will be placed
2153
in the @code{private} field.
2154
 
2155
There is no result from @code{@var{xyz}_symfile_init}, but it can call
2156
@code{error} if it detects an unavoidable problem.
2157
 
2158
@item @var{xyz}_new_init()
2159
 
2160
Called from @code{symbol_file_add} when discarding existing symbols.
2161
This function needs only handle the symbol-reading module's internal
2162
state; the symbol table data structures visible to the rest of
2163
@value{GDBN} will be discarded by @code{symbol_file_add}.  It has no
2164
arguments and no result.  It may be called after
2165
@code{@var{xyz}_symfile_init}, if a new symbol table is being read, or
2166
may be called alone if all symbols are simply being discarded.
2167
 
2168
@item @var{xyz}_symfile_read(struct sym_fns *sf, CORE_ADDR addr, int mainline)
2169
 
2170
Called from @code{symbol_file_add} to actually read the symbols from a
2171
symbol-file into a set of psymtabs or symtabs.
2172
 
2173
@code{sf} points to the @code{struct sym_fns} originally passed to
2174
@code{@var{xyz}_sym_init} for possible initialization.  @code{addr} is
2175
the offset between the file's specified start address and its true
2176
address in memory.  @code{mainline} is 1 if this is the main symbol
2177
table being read, and 0 if a secondary symbol file (e.g., shared library
2178
or dynamically loaded file) is being read.@refill
2179
@end table
2180
 
2181
In addition, if a symbol-reading module creates psymtabs when
2182
@var{xyz}_symfile_read is called, these psymtabs will contain a pointer
2183
to a function @code{@var{xyz}_psymtab_to_symtab}, which can be called
2184
from any point in the @value{GDBN} symbol-handling code.
2185
 
2186
@table @code
2187
@item @var{xyz}_psymtab_to_symtab (struct partial_symtab *pst)
2188
 
2189
Called from @code{psymtab_to_symtab} (or the @code{PSYMTAB_TO_SYMTAB} macro) if
2190
the psymtab has not already been read in and had its @code{pst->symtab}
2191
pointer set.  The argument is the psymtab to be fleshed-out into a
2192
symtab.  Upon return, @code{pst->readin} should have been set to 1, and
2193
@code{pst->symtab} should contain a pointer to the new corresponding symtab, or
2194
zero if there were no symbols in that part of the symbol file.
2195
@end table
2196
 
2197
@section Partial Symbol Tables
2198
 
2199
@value{GDBN} has three types of symbol tables:
2200
 
2201
@itemize @bullet
2202
@cindex full symbol table
2203
@cindex symtabs
2204
@item
2205
Full symbol tables (@dfn{symtabs}).  These contain the main
2206
information about symbols and addresses.
2207
 
2208
@cindex psymtabs
2209
@item
2210
Partial symbol tables (@dfn{psymtabs}).  These contain enough
2211
information to know when to read the corresponding part of the full
2212
symbol table.
2213
 
2214
@cindex minimal symbol table
2215
@cindex minsymtabs
2216
@item
2217
Minimal symbol tables (@dfn{msymtabs}).  These contain information
2218
gleaned from non-debugging symbols.
2219
@end itemize
2220
 
2221
@cindex partial symbol table
2222
This section describes partial symbol tables.
2223
 
2224
A psymtab is constructed by doing a very quick pass over an executable
2225
file's debugging information.  Small amounts of information are
2226
extracted---enough to identify which parts of the symbol table will
2227
need to be re-read and fully digested later, when the user needs the
2228
information.  The speed of this pass causes @value{GDBN} to start up very
2229
quickly.  Later, as the detailed rereading occurs, it occurs in small
2230
pieces, at various times, and the delay therefrom is mostly invisible to
2231
the user.
2232
@c (@xref{Symbol Reading}.)
2233
 
2234
The symbols that show up in a file's psymtab should be, roughly, those
2235
visible to the debugger's user when the program is not running code from
2236
that file.  These include external symbols and types, static symbols and
2237
types, and @code{enum} values declared at file scope.
2238
 
2239
The psymtab also contains the range of instruction addresses that the
2240
full symbol table would represent.
2241
 
2242
@cindex finding a symbol
2243
@cindex symbol lookup
2244
The idea is that there are only two ways for the user (or much of the
2245
code in the debugger) to reference a symbol:
2246
 
2247
@itemize @bullet
2248
@findex find_pc_function
2249
@findex find_pc_line
2250
@item
2251
By its address (e.g., execution stops at some address which is inside a
2252
function in this file).  The address will be noticed to be in the
2253
range of this psymtab, and the full symtab will be read in.
2254
@code{find_pc_function}, @code{find_pc_line}, and other
2255
@code{find_pc_@dots{}} functions handle this.
2256
 
2257
@cindex lookup_symbol
2258
@item
2259
By its name
2260
(e.g., the user asks to print a variable, or set a breakpoint on a
2261
function).  Global names and file-scope names will be found in the
2262
psymtab, which will cause the symtab to be pulled in.  Local names will
2263
have to be qualified by a global name, or a file-scope name, in which
2264
case we will have already read in the symtab as we evaluated the
2265
qualifier.  Or, a local symbol can be referenced when we are ``in'' a
2266
local scope, in which case the first case applies.  @code{lookup_symbol}
2267
does most of the work here.
2268
@end itemize
2269
 
2270
The only reason that psymtabs exist is to cause a symtab to be read in
2271
at the right moment.  Any symbol that can be elided from a psymtab,
2272
while still causing that to happen, should not appear in it.  Since
2273
psymtabs don't have the idea of scope, you can't put local symbols in
2274
them anyway.  Psymtabs don't have the idea of the type of a symbol,
2275
either, so types need not appear, unless they will be referenced by
2276
name.
2277
 
2278
It is a bug for @value{GDBN} to behave one way when only a psymtab has
2279
been read, and another way if the corresponding symtab has been read
2280
in.  Such bugs are typically caused by a psymtab that does not contain
2281
all the visible symbols, or which has the wrong instruction address
2282
ranges.
2283
 
2284
The psymtab for a particular section of a symbol file (objfile) could be
2285
thrown away after the symtab has been read in.  The symtab should always
2286
be searched before the psymtab, so the psymtab will never be used (in a
2287
bug-free environment).  Currently, psymtabs are allocated on an obstack,
2288
and all the psymbols themselves are allocated in a pair of large arrays
2289
on an obstack, so there is little to be gained by trying to free them
2290
unless you want to do a lot more work.
2291
 
2292
Whether or not psymtabs are created depends on the objfile's symbol
2293
reader.  The core of @value{GDBN} hides the details of partial symbols
2294
and partial symbol tables behind a set of function pointers known as
2295
the @dfn{quick symbol functions}.  These are documented in
2296
@file{symfile.h}.
2297
 
2298
@section Types
2299
 
2300
@unnumberedsubsec Fundamental Types (e.g., @code{FT_VOID}, @code{FT_BOOLEAN}).
2301
 
2302
@cindex fundamental types
2303
These are the fundamental types that @value{GDBN} uses internally.  Fundamental
2304
types from the various debugging formats (stabs, ELF, etc) are mapped
2305
into one of these.  They are basically a union of all fundamental types
2306
that @value{GDBN} knows about for all the languages that @value{GDBN}
2307
knows about.
2308
 
2309
@unnumberedsubsec Type Codes (e.g., @code{TYPE_CODE_PTR}, @code{TYPE_CODE_ARRAY}).
2310
 
2311
@cindex type codes
2312
Each time @value{GDBN} builds an internal type, it marks it with one
2313
of these types.  The type may be a fundamental type, such as
2314
@code{TYPE_CODE_INT}, or a derived type, such as @code{TYPE_CODE_PTR}
2315
which is a pointer to another type.  Typically, several @code{FT_*}
2316
types map to one @code{TYPE_CODE_*} type, and are distinguished by
2317
other members of the type struct, such as whether the type is signed
2318
or unsigned, and how many bits it uses.
2319
 
2320
@unnumberedsubsec Builtin Types (e.g., @code{builtin_type_void}, @code{builtin_type_char}).
2321
 
2322
These are instances of type structs that roughly correspond to
2323
fundamental types and are created as global types for @value{GDBN} to
2324
use for various ugly historical reasons.  We eventually want to
2325
eliminate these.  Note for example that @code{builtin_type_int}
2326
initialized in @file{gdbtypes.c} is basically the same as a
2327
@code{TYPE_CODE_INT} type that is initialized in @file{c-lang.c} for
2328
an @code{FT_INTEGER} fundamental type.  The difference is that the
2329
@code{builtin_type} is not associated with any particular objfile, and
2330
only one instance exists, while @file{c-lang.c} builds as many
2331
@code{TYPE_CODE_INT} types as needed, with each one associated with
2332
some particular objfile.
2333
 
2334
@section Object File Formats
2335
@cindex object file formats
2336
 
2337
@subsection a.out
2338
 
2339
@cindex @code{a.out} format
2340
The @code{a.out} format is the original file format for Unix.  It
2341
consists of three sections: @code{text}, @code{data}, and @code{bss},
2342
which are for program code, initialized data, and uninitialized data,
2343
respectively.
2344
 
2345
The @code{a.out} format is so simple that it doesn't have any reserved
2346
place for debugging information.  (Hey, the original Unix hackers used
2347
@samp{adb}, which is a machine-language debugger!)  The only debugging
2348
format for @code{a.out} is stabs, which is encoded as a set of normal
2349
symbols with distinctive attributes.
2350
 
2351
The basic @code{a.out} reader is in @file{dbxread.c}.
2352
 
2353
@subsection COFF
2354
 
2355
@cindex COFF format
2356
The COFF format was introduced with System V Release 3 (SVR3) Unix.
2357
COFF files may have multiple sections, each prefixed by a header.  The
2358
number of sections is limited.
2359
 
2360
The COFF specification includes support for debugging.  Although this
2361
was a step forward, the debugging information was woefully limited.
2362
For instance, it was not possible to represent code that came from an
2363
included file.  GNU's COFF-using configs often use stabs-type info,
2364
encapsulated in special sections.
2365
 
2366
The COFF reader is in @file{coffread.c}.
2367
 
2368
@subsection ECOFF
2369
 
2370
@cindex ECOFF format
2371
ECOFF is an extended COFF originally introduced for Mips and Alpha
2372
workstations.
2373
 
2374
The basic ECOFF reader is in @file{mipsread.c}.
2375
 
2376
@subsection XCOFF
2377
 
2378
@cindex XCOFF format
2379
The IBM RS/6000 running AIX uses an object file format called XCOFF.
2380
The COFF sections, symbols, and line numbers are used, but debugging
2381
symbols are @code{dbx}-style stabs whose strings are located in the
2382
@code{.debug} section (rather than the string table).  For more
2383
information, see @ref{Top,,,stabs,The Stabs Debugging Format}.
2384
 
2385
The shared library scheme has a clean interface for figuring out what
2386
shared libraries are in use, but the catch is that everything which
2387
refers to addresses (symbol tables and breakpoints at least) needs to be
2388
relocated for both shared libraries and the main executable.  At least
2389
using the standard mechanism this can only be done once the program has
2390
been run (or the core file has been read).
2391
 
2392
@subsection PE
2393
 
2394
@cindex PE-COFF format
2395
Windows 95 and NT use the PE (@dfn{Portable Executable}) format for their
2396
executables.  PE is basically COFF with additional headers.
2397
 
2398
While BFD includes special PE support, @value{GDBN} needs only the basic
2399
COFF reader.
2400
 
2401
@subsection ELF
2402
 
2403
@cindex ELF format
2404
The ELF format came with System V Release 4 (SVR4) Unix.  ELF is
2405
similar to COFF in being organized into a number of sections, but it
2406
removes many of COFF's limitations.  Debugging info may be either stabs
2407
encapsulated in ELF sections, or more commonly these days, DWARF.
2408
 
2409
The basic ELF reader is in @file{elfread.c}.
2410
 
2411
@subsection SOM
2412
 
2413
@cindex SOM format
2414
SOM is HP's object file and debug format (not to be confused with IBM's
2415
SOM, which is a cross-language ABI).
2416
 
2417
The SOM reader is in @file{somread.c}.
2418
 
2419
@section Debugging File Formats
2420
 
2421
This section describes characteristics of debugging information that
2422
are independent of the object file format.
2423
 
2424
@subsection stabs
2425
 
2426
@cindex stabs debugging info
2427
@code{stabs} started out as special symbols within the @code{a.out}
2428
format.  Since then, it has been encapsulated into other file
2429
formats, such as COFF and ELF.
2430
 
2431
While @file{dbxread.c} does some of the basic stab processing,
2432
including for encapsulated versions, @file{stabsread.c} does
2433
the real work.
2434
 
2435
@subsection COFF
2436
 
2437
@cindex COFF debugging info
2438
The basic COFF definition includes debugging information.  The level
2439
of support is minimal and non-extensible, and is not often used.
2440
 
2441
@subsection Mips debug (Third Eye)
2442
 
2443
@cindex ECOFF debugging info
2444
ECOFF includes a definition of a special debug format.
2445
 
2446
The file @file{mdebugread.c} implements reading for this format.
2447
 
2448
@c mention DWARF 1 as a formerly-supported format
2449
 
2450
@subsection DWARF 2
2451
 
2452
@cindex DWARF 2 debugging info
2453
DWARF 2 is an improved but incompatible version of DWARF 1.
2454
 
2455
The DWARF 2 reader is in @file{dwarf2read.c}.
2456
 
2457
@subsection Compressed DWARF 2
2458
 
2459
@cindex Compressed DWARF 2 debugging info
2460
Compressed DWARF 2 is not technically a separate debugging format, but
2461
merely DWARF 2 debug information that has been compressed.  In this
2462
format, every object-file section holding DWARF 2 debugging
2463
information is compressed and prepended with a header.  (The section
2464
is also typically renamed, so a section called @code{.debug_info} in a
2465
DWARF 2 binary would be called @code{.zdebug_info} in a compressed
2466
DWARF 2 binary.)  The header is 12 bytes long:
2467
 
2468
@itemize @bullet
2469
@item
2470
4 bytes: the literal string ``ZLIB''
2471
@item
2472
8 bytes: the uncompressed size of the section, in big-endian byte
2473
order.
2474
@end itemize
2475
 
2476
The same reader is used for both compressed an normal DWARF 2 info.
2477
Section decompression is done in @code{zlib_decompress_section} in
2478
@file{dwarf2read.c}.
2479
 
2480
@subsection DWARF 3
2481
 
2482
@cindex DWARF 3 debugging info
2483
DWARF 3 is an improved version of DWARF 2.
2484
 
2485
@subsection SOM
2486
 
2487
@cindex SOM debugging info
2488
Like COFF, the SOM definition includes debugging information.
2489
 
2490
@section Adding a New Symbol Reader to @value{GDBN}
2491
 
2492
@cindex adding debugging info reader
2493
If you are using an existing object file format (@code{a.out}, COFF, ELF, etc),
2494
there is probably little to be done.
2495
 
2496
If you need to add a new object file format, you must first add it to
2497
BFD.  This is beyond the scope of this document.
2498
 
2499
You must then arrange for the BFD code to provide access to the
2500
debugging symbols.  Generally @value{GDBN} will have to call swapping
2501
routines from BFD and a few other BFD internal routines to locate the
2502
debugging information.  As much as possible, @value{GDBN} should not
2503
depend on the BFD internal data structures.
2504
 
2505
For some targets (e.g., COFF), there is a special transfer vector used
2506
to call swapping routines, since the external data structures on various
2507
platforms have different sizes and layouts.  Specialized routines that
2508
will only ever be implemented by one object file format may be called
2509
directly.  This interface should be described in a file
2510
@file{bfd/lib@var{xyz}.h}, which is included by @value{GDBN}.
2511
 
2512
@section Memory Management for Symbol Files
2513
 
2514
Most memory associated with a loaded symbol file is stored on
2515
its @code{objfile_obstack}.  This includes symbols, types,
2516
namespace data, and other information produced by the symbol readers.
2517
 
2518
Because this data lives on the objfile's obstack, it is automatically
2519
released when the objfile is unloaded or reloaded.  Therefore one
2520
objfile must not reference symbol or type data from another objfile;
2521
they could be unloaded at different times.
2522
 
2523
User convenience variables, et cetera, have associated types.  Normally
2524
these types live in the associated objfile.  However, when the objfile
2525
is unloaded, those types are deep copied to global memory, so that
2526
the values of the user variables and history items are not lost.
2527
 
2528
 
2529
@node Language Support
2530
 
2531
@chapter Language Support
2532
 
2533
@cindex language support
2534
@value{GDBN}'s language support is mainly driven by the symbol reader,
2535
although it is possible for the user to set the source language
2536
manually.
2537
 
2538
@value{GDBN} chooses the source language by looking at the extension
2539
of the file recorded in the debug info; @file{.c} means C, @file{.f}
2540
means Fortran, etc.  It may also use a special-purpose language
2541
identifier if the debug format supports it, like with DWARF.
2542
 
2543
@section Adding a Source Language to @value{GDBN}
2544
 
2545
@cindex adding source language
2546
To add other languages to @value{GDBN}'s expression parser, follow the
2547
following steps:
2548
 
2549
@table @emph
2550
@item Create the expression parser.
2551
 
2552
@cindex expression parser
2553
This should reside in a file @file{@var{lang}-exp.y}.  Routines for
2554
building parsed expressions into a @code{union exp_element} list are in
2555
@file{parse.c}.
2556
 
2557
@cindex language parser
2558
Since we can't depend upon everyone having Bison, and YACC produces
2559
parsers that define a bunch of global names, the following lines
2560
@strong{must} be included at the top of the YACC parser, to prevent the
2561
various parsers from defining the same global names:
2562
 
2563
@smallexample
2564
#define yyparse         @var{lang}_parse
2565
#define yylex           @var{lang}_lex
2566
#define yyerror         @var{lang}_error
2567
#define yylval          @var{lang}_lval
2568
#define yychar          @var{lang}_char
2569
#define yydebug         @var{lang}_debug
2570
#define yypact          @var{lang}_pact
2571
#define yyr1            @var{lang}_r1
2572
#define yyr2            @var{lang}_r2
2573
#define yydef           @var{lang}_def
2574
#define yychk           @var{lang}_chk
2575
#define yypgo           @var{lang}_pgo
2576
#define yyact           @var{lang}_act
2577
#define yyexca          @var{lang}_exca
2578
#define yyerrflag       @var{lang}_errflag
2579
#define yynerrs         @var{lang}_nerrs
2580
@end smallexample
2581
 
2582
At the bottom of your parser, define a @code{struct language_defn} and
2583
initialize it with the right values for your language.  Define an
2584
@code{initialize_@var{lang}} routine and have it call
2585
@samp{add_language(@var{lang}_language_defn)} to tell the rest of @value{GDBN}
2586
that your language exists.  You'll need some other supporting variables
2587
and functions, which will be used via pointers from your
2588
@code{@var{lang}_language_defn}.  See the declaration of @code{struct
2589
language_defn} in @file{language.h}, and the other @file{*-exp.y} files,
2590
for more information.
2591
 
2592
@item Add any evaluation routines, if necessary
2593
 
2594
@cindex expression evaluation routines
2595
@findex evaluate_subexp
2596
@findex prefixify_subexp
2597
@findex length_of_subexp
2598
If you need new opcodes (that represent the operations of the language),
2599
add them to the enumerated type in @file{expression.h}.  Add support
2600
code for these operations in the @code{evaluate_subexp} function
2601
defined in the file @file{eval.c}.  Add cases
2602
for new opcodes in two functions from @file{parse.c}:
2603
@code{prefixify_subexp} and @code{length_of_subexp}.  These compute
2604
the number of @code{exp_element}s that a given operation takes up.
2605
 
2606
@item Update some existing code
2607
 
2608
Add an enumerated identifier for your language to the enumerated type
2609
@code{enum language} in @file{defs.h}.
2610
 
2611
Update the routines in @file{language.c} so your language is included.
2612
These routines include type predicates and such, which (in some cases)
2613
are language dependent.  If your language does not appear in the switch
2614
statement, an error is reported.
2615
 
2616
@vindex current_language
2617
Also included in @file{language.c} is the code that updates the variable
2618
@code{current_language}, and the routines that translate the
2619
@code{language_@var{lang}} enumerated identifier into a printable
2620
string.
2621
 
2622
@findex _initialize_language
2623
Update the function @code{_initialize_language} to include your
2624
language.  This function picks the default language upon startup, so is
2625
dependent upon which languages that @value{GDBN} is built for.
2626
 
2627
@findex allocate_symtab
2628
Update @code{allocate_symtab} in @file{symfile.c} and/or symbol-reading
2629
code so that the language of each symtab (source file) is set properly.
2630
This is used to determine the language to use at each stack frame level.
2631
Currently, the language is set based upon the extension of the source
2632
file.  If the language can be better inferred from the symbol
2633
information, please set the language of the symtab in the symbol-reading
2634
code.
2635
 
2636
@findex print_subexp
2637
@findex op_print_tab
2638
Add helper code to @code{print_subexp} (in @file{expprint.c}) to handle any new
2639
expression opcodes you have added to @file{expression.h}.  Also, add the
2640
printed representations of your operators to @code{op_print_tab}.
2641
 
2642
@item Add a place of call
2643
 
2644
@findex parse_exp_1
2645
Add a call to @code{@var{lang}_parse()} and @code{@var{lang}_error} in
2646
@code{parse_exp_1} (defined in @file{parse.c}).
2647
 
2648
@item Edit @file{Makefile.in}
2649
 
2650
Add dependencies in @file{Makefile.in}.  Make sure you update the macro
2651
variables such as @code{HFILES} and @code{OBJS}, otherwise your code may
2652
not get linked in, or, worse yet, it may not get @code{tar}red into the
2653
distribution!
2654
@end table
2655
 
2656
 
2657
@node Host Definition
2658
 
2659
@chapter Host Definition
2660
 
2661
With the advent of Autoconf, it's rarely necessary to have host
2662
definition machinery anymore.  The following information is provided,
2663
mainly, as an historical reference.
2664
 
2665
@section Adding a New Host
2666
 
2667
@cindex adding a new host
2668
@cindex host, adding
2669
@value{GDBN}'s host configuration support normally happens via Autoconf.
2670
New host-specific definitions should not be needed.  Older hosts
2671
@value{GDBN} still use the host-specific definitions and files listed
2672
below, but these mostly exist for historical reasons, and will
2673
eventually disappear.
2674
 
2675
@table @file
2676
@item gdb/config/@var{arch}/@var{xyz}.mh
2677
This file is a Makefile fragment that once contained both host and
2678
native configuration information (@pxref{Native Debugging}) for the
2679
machine @var{xyz}.  The host configuration information is now handled
2680
by Autoconf.
2681
 
2682
Host configuration information included definitions for @code{CC},
2683
@code{SYSV_DEFINE}, @code{XM_CFLAGS}, @code{XM_ADD_FILES},
2684
@code{XM_CLIBS}, @code{XM_CDEPS}, etc.; see @file{Makefile.in}.
2685
 
2686
New host-only configurations do not need this file.
2687
 
2688
@end table
2689
 
2690
(Files named @file{gdb/config/@var{arch}/xm-@var{xyz}.h} were once
2691
used to define host-specific macros, but were no longer needed and
2692
have all been removed.)
2693
 
2694
@subheading Generic Host Support Files
2695
 
2696
@cindex generic host support
2697
There are some ``generic'' versions of routines that can be used by
2698
various systems.
2699
 
2700
@table @file
2701
@cindex remote debugging support
2702
@cindex serial line support
2703
@item ser-unix.c
2704
This contains serial line support for Unix systems.  It is included by
2705
default on all Unix-like hosts.
2706
 
2707
@item ser-pipe.c
2708
This contains serial pipe support for Unix systems.  It is included by
2709
default on all Unix-like hosts.
2710
 
2711
@item ser-mingw.c
2712
This contains serial line support for 32-bit programs running under
2713
Windows using MinGW.
2714
 
2715
@item ser-go32.c
2716
This contains serial line support for 32-bit programs running under DOS,
2717
using the DJGPP (a.k.a.@: GO32) execution environment.
2718
 
2719
@cindex TCP remote support
2720
@item ser-tcp.c
2721
This contains generic TCP support using sockets.  It is included by
2722
default on all Unix-like hosts and with MinGW.
2723
@end table
2724
 
2725
@section Host Conditionals
2726
 
2727
When @value{GDBN} is configured and compiled, various macros are
2728
defined or left undefined, to control compilation based on the
2729
attributes of the host system.  While formerly they could be set in
2730
host-specific header files, at present they can be changed only by
2731
setting @code{CFLAGS} when building, or by editing the source code.
2732
 
2733
These macros and their meanings (or if the meaning is not documented
2734
here, then one of the source files where they are used is indicated)
2735
are:
2736
 
2737
@ftable @code
2738
@item @value{GDBN}INIT_FILENAME
2739
The default name of @value{GDBN}'s initialization file (normally
2740
@file{.gdbinit}).
2741
 
2742
@item SIGWINCH_HANDLER
2743
If your host defines @code{SIGWINCH}, you can define this to be the name
2744
of a function to be called if @code{SIGWINCH} is received.
2745
 
2746
@item SIGWINCH_HANDLER_BODY
2747
Define this to expand into code that will define the function named by
2748
the expansion of @code{SIGWINCH_HANDLER}.
2749
 
2750
@item CRLF_SOURCE_FILES
2751
@cindex DOS text files
2752
Define this if host files use @code{\r\n} rather than @code{\n} as a
2753
line terminator.  This will cause source file listings to omit @code{\r}
2754
characters when printing and it will allow @code{\r\n} line endings of files
2755
which are ``sourced'' by gdb.  It must be possible to open files in binary
2756
mode using @code{O_BINARY} or, for fopen, @code{"rb"}.
2757
 
2758
@item DEFAULT_PROMPT
2759
@cindex prompt
2760
The default value of the prompt string (normally @code{"(gdb) "}).
2761
 
2762
@item DEV_TTY
2763
@cindex terminal device
2764
The name of the generic TTY device, defaults to @code{"/dev/tty"}.
2765
 
2766
@item ISATTY
2767
Substitute for isatty, if not available.
2768
 
2769
@item FOPEN_RB
2770
Define this if binary files are opened the same way as text files.
2771
 
2772
@item CC_HAS_LONG_LONG
2773
@cindex @code{long long} data type
2774
Define this if the host C compiler supports @code{long long}.  This is set
2775
by the @code{configure} script.
2776
 
2777
@item PRINTF_HAS_LONG_LONG
2778
Define this if the host can handle printing of long long integers via
2779
the printf format conversion specifier @code{ll}.  This is set by the
2780
@code{configure} script.
2781
 
2782
@item LSEEK_NOT_LINEAR
2783
Define this if @code{lseek (n)} does not necessarily move to byte number
2784
@code{n} in the file.  This is only used when reading source files.  It
2785
is normally faster to define @code{CRLF_SOURCE_FILES} when possible.
2786
 
2787
@item lint
2788
Define this to help placate @code{lint} in some situations.
2789
 
2790
@item volatile
2791
Define this to override the defaults of @code{__volatile__} or
2792
@code{/**/}.
2793
@end ftable
2794
 
2795
 
2796
@node Target Architecture Definition
2797
 
2798
@chapter Target Architecture Definition
2799
 
2800
@cindex target architecture definition
2801
@value{GDBN}'s target architecture defines what sort of
2802
machine-language programs @value{GDBN} can work with, and how it works
2803
with them.
2804
 
2805
The target architecture object is implemented as the C structure
2806
@code{struct gdbarch *}.  The structure, and its methods, are generated
2807
using the Bourne shell script @file{gdbarch.sh}.
2808
 
2809
@menu
2810
* OS ABI Variant Handling::
2811
* Initialize New Architecture::
2812
* Registers and Memory::
2813
* Pointers and Addresses::
2814
* Address Classes::
2815
* Register Representation::
2816
* Frame Interpretation::
2817
* Inferior Call Setup::
2818
* Adding support for debugging core files::
2819
* Defining Other Architecture Features::
2820
* Adding a New Target::
2821
@end menu
2822
 
2823
@node  OS ABI Variant Handling
2824
@section Operating System ABI Variant Handling
2825
@cindex OS ABI variants
2826
 
2827
@value{GDBN} provides a mechanism for handling variations in OS
2828
ABIs.  An OS ABI variant may have influence over any number of
2829
variables in the target architecture definition.  There are two major
2830
components in the OS ABI mechanism: sniffers and handlers.
2831
 
2832
A @dfn{sniffer} examines a file matching a BFD architecture/flavour pair
2833
(the architecture may be wildcarded) in an attempt to determine the
2834
OS ABI of that file.  Sniffers with a wildcarded architecture are considered
2835
to be @dfn{generic}, while sniffers for a specific architecture are
2836
considered to be @dfn{specific}.  A match from a specific sniffer
2837
overrides a match from a generic sniffer.  Multiple sniffers for an
2838
architecture/flavour may exist, in order to differentiate between two
2839
different operating systems which use the same basic file format.  The
2840
OS ABI framework provides a generic sniffer for ELF-format files which
2841
examines the @code{EI_OSABI} field of the ELF header, as well as note
2842
sections known to be used by several operating systems.
2843
 
2844
@cindex fine-tuning @code{gdbarch} structure
2845
A @dfn{handler} is used to fine-tune the @code{gdbarch} structure for the
2846
selected OS ABI.  There may be only one handler for a given OS ABI
2847
for each BFD architecture.
2848
 
2849
The following OS ABI variants are defined in @file{defs.h}:
2850
 
2851
@table @code
2852
 
2853
@findex GDB_OSABI_UNINITIALIZED
2854
@item GDB_OSABI_UNINITIALIZED
2855
Used for struct gdbarch_info if ABI is still uninitialized.
2856
 
2857
@findex GDB_OSABI_UNKNOWN
2858
@item GDB_OSABI_UNKNOWN
2859
The ABI of the inferior is unknown.  The default @code{gdbarch}
2860
settings for the architecture will be used.
2861
 
2862
@findex GDB_OSABI_SVR4
2863
@item GDB_OSABI_SVR4
2864
UNIX System V Release 4.
2865
 
2866
@findex GDB_OSABI_HURD
2867
@item GDB_OSABI_HURD
2868
GNU using the Hurd kernel.
2869
 
2870
@findex GDB_OSABI_SOLARIS
2871
@item GDB_OSABI_SOLARIS
2872
Sun Solaris.
2873
 
2874
@findex GDB_OSABI_OSF1
2875
@item GDB_OSABI_OSF1
2876
OSF/1, including Digital UNIX and Compaq Tru64 UNIX.
2877
 
2878
@findex GDB_OSABI_LINUX
2879
@item GDB_OSABI_LINUX
2880
GNU using the Linux kernel.
2881
 
2882
@findex GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_AOUT
2883
@item GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_AOUT
2884
FreeBSD using the @code{a.out} executable format.
2885
 
2886
@findex GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_ELF
2887
@item GDB_OSABI_FREEBSD_ELF
2888
FreeBSD using the ELF executable format.
2889
 
2890
@findex GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_AOUT
2891
@item GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_AOUT
2892
NetBSD using the @code{a.out} executable format.
2893
 
2894
@findex GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_ELF
2895
@item GDB_OSABI_NETBSD_ELF
2896
NetBSD using the ELF executable format.
2897
 
2898
@findex GDB_OSABI_OPENBSD_ELF
2899
@item GDB_OSABI_OPENBSD_ELF
2900
OpenBSD using the ELF executable format.
2901
 
2902
@findex GDB_OSABI_WINCE
2903
@item GDB_OSABI_WINCE
2904
Windows CE.
2905
 
2906
@findex GDB_OSABI_GO32
2907
@item GDB_OSABI_GO32
2908
DJGPP.
2909
 
2910
@findex GDB_OSABI_IRIX
2911
@item GDB_OSABI_IRIX
2912
Irix.
2913
 
2914
@findex GDB_OSABI_INTERIX
2915
@item GDB_OSABI_INTERIX
2916
Interix (Posix layer for MS-Windows systems).
2917
 
2918
@findex GDB_OSABI_HPUX_ELF
2919
@item GDB_OSABI_HPUX_ELF
2920
HP/UX using the ELF executable format.
2921
 
2922
@findex GDB_OSABI_HPUX_SOM
2923
@item GDB_OSABI_HPUX_SOM
2924
HP/UX using the SOM executable format.
2925
 
2926
@findex GDB_OSABI_QNXNTO
2927
@item GDB_OSABI_QNXNTO
2928
QNX Neutrino.
2929
 
2930
@findex GDB_OSABI_CYGWIN
2931
@item GDB_OSABI_CYGWIN
2932
Cygwin.
2933
 
2934
@findex GDB_OSABI_AIX
2935
@item GDB_OSABI_AIX
2936
AIX.
2937
 
2938
@end table
2939
 
2940
Here are the functions that make up the OS ABI framework:
2941
 
2942
@deftypefun {const char *} gdbarch_osabi_name (enum gdb_osabi @var{osabi})
2943
Return the name of the OS ABI corresponding to @var{osabi}.
2944
@end deftypefun
2945
 
2946
@deftypefun void gdbarch_register_osabi (enum bfd_architecture @var{arch}, unsigned long @var{machine}, enum gdb_osabi @var{osabi}, void (*@var{init_osabi})(struct gdbarch_info @var{info}, struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}))
2947
Register the OS ABI handler specified by @var{init_osabi} for the
2948
architecture, machine type and OS ABI specified by @var{arch},
2949
@var{machine} and @var{osabi}.  In most cases, a value of zero for the
2950
machine type, which implies the architecture's default machine type,
2951
will suffice.
2952
@end deftypefun
2953
 
2954
@deftypefun void gdbarch_register_osabi_sniffer (enum bfd_architecture @var{arch}, enum bfd_flavour @var{flavour}, enum gdb_osabi (*@var{sniffer})(bfd *@var{abfd}))
2955
Register the OS ABI file sniffer specified by @var{sniffer} for the
2956
BFD architecture/flavour pair specified by @var{arch} and @var{flavour}.
2957
If @var{arch} is @code{bfd_arch_unknown}, the sniffer is considered to
2958
be generic, and is allowed to examine @var{flavour}-flavoured files for
2959
any architecture.
2960
@end deftypefun
2961
 
2962
@deftypefun {enum gdb_osabi} gdbarch_lookup_osabi (bfd *@var{abfd})
2963
Examine the file described by @var{abfd} to determine its OS ABI.
2964
The value @code{GDB_OSABI_UNKNOWN} is returned if the OS ABI cannot
2965
be determined.
2966
@end deftypefun
2967
 
2968
@deftypefun void gdbarch_init_osabi (struct gdbarch info @var{info}, struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, enum gdb_osabi @var{osabi})
2969
Invoke the OS ABI handler corresponding to @var{osabi} to fine-tune the
2970
@code{gdbarch} structure specified by @var{gdbarch}.  If a handler
2971
corresponding to @var{osabi} has not been registered for @var{gdbarch}'s
2972
architecture, a warning will be issued and the debugging session will continue
2973
with the defaults already established for @var{gdbarch}.
2974
@end deftypefun
2975
 
2976
@deftypefun void generic_elf_osabi_sniff_abi_tag_sections (bfd *@var{abfd}, asection *@var{sect}, void *@var{obj})
2977
Helper routine for ELF file sniffers.  Examine the file described by
2978
@var{abfd} and look at ABI tag note sections to determine the OS ABI
2979
from the note.  This function should be called via
2980
@code{bfd_map_over_sections}.
2981
@end deftypefun
2982
 
2983
@node Initialize New Architecture
2984
@section Initializing a New Architecture
2985
 
2986
@menu
2987
* How an Architecture is Represented::
2988
* Looking Up an Existing Architecture::
2989
* Creating a New Architecture::
2990
@end menu
2991
 
2992
@node How an Architecture is Represented
2993
@subsection How an Architecture is Represented
2994
@cindex architecture representation
2995
@cindex representation of architecture
2996
 
2997
Each @code{gdbarch} is associated with a single @sc{bfd} architecture,
2998
via a @code{bfd_arch_@var{arch}} in the @code{bfd_architecture}
2999
enumeration.  The @code{gdbarch} is registered by a call to
3000
@code{register_gdbarch_init}, usually from the file's
3001
@code{_initialize_@var{filename}} routine, which will be automatically
3002
called during @value{GDBN} startup.  The arguments are a @sc{bfd}
3003
architecture constant and an initialization function.
3004
 
3005
@findex _initialize_@var{arch}_tdep
3006
@cindex @file{@var{arch}-tdep.c}
3007
A @value{GDBN} description for a new architecture, @var{arch} is created by
3008
defining a global function @code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep}, by
3009
convention in the source file @file{@var{arch}-tdep.c}.  For example,
3010
in the case of the OpenRISC 1000, this function is called
3011
@code{_initialize_or1k_tdep} and is found in the file
3012
@file{or1k-tdep.c}.
3013
 
3014
@cindex @file{configure.tgt}
3015
@cindex @code{gdbarch}
3016
@findex gdbarch_register
3017
The resulting object files containing the implementation of the
3018
@code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep} function are specified in the @value{GDBN}
3019
@file{configure.tgt} file, which includes a large case statement
3020
pattern matching against the @code{--target} option of the
3021
@code{configure} script.  The new @code{struct gdbarch} is created
3022
within the @code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep} function by calling
3023
@code{gdbarch_register}:
3024
 
3025
@smallexample
3026
void gdbarch_register (enum bfd_architecture    @var{architecture},
3027
                       gdbarch_init_ftype      *@var{init_func},
3028
                       gdbarch_dump_tdep_ftype *@var{tdep_dump_func});
3029
@end smallexample
3030
 
3031
The @var{architecture} will identify the unique @sc{bfd} to be
3032
associated with this @code{gdbarch}.  The @var{init_func} funciton is
3033
called to create and return the new @code{struct gdbarch}.  The
3034
@var{tdep_dump_func} function will dump the target specific details
3035
associated with this architecture.
3036
 
3037
For example the function @code{_initialize_or1k_tdep} creates its
3038
architecture for 32-bit OpenRISC 1000 architectures by calling:
3039
 
3040
@smallexample
3041
gdbarch_register (bfd_arch_or32, or1k_gdbarch_init, or1k_dump_tdep);
3042
@end smallexample
3043
 
3044
@node Looking Up an Existing Architecture
3045
@subsection Looking Up an Existing Architecture
3046
@cindex @code{gdbarch} lookup
3047
 
3048
The initialization function has this prototype:
3049
 
3050
@smallexample
3051
static struct gdbarch *
3052
@var{arch}_gdbarch_init (struct gdbarch_info @var{info},
3053
                         struct gdbarch_list *@var{arches})
3054
@end smallexample
3055
 
3056
The @var{info} argument contains parameters used to select the correct
3057
architecture, and @var{arches} is a list of architectures which
3058
have already been created with the same @code{bfd_arch_@var{arch}}
3059
value.
3060
 
3061
The initialization function should first make sure that @var{info}
3062
is acceptable, and return @code{NULL} if it is not.  Then, it should
3063
search through @var{arches} for an exact match to @var{info}, and
3064
return one if found.  Lastly, if no exact match was found, it should
3065
create a new architecture based on @var{info} and return it.
3066
 
3067
@findex gdbarch_list_lookup_by_info
3068
@cindex @code{gdbarch_info}
3069
The lookup is done using @code{gdbarch_list_lookup_by_info}.  It is
3070
passed the list of existing architectures, @var{arches}, and the
3071
@code{struct gdbarch_info}, @var{info}, and returns the first matching
3072
architecture it finds, or @code{NULL} if none are found.  If an
3073
architecture is found it can be returned as the result from the
3074
initialization function, otherwise a new @code{struct gdbach} will need
3075
to be created.
3076
 
3077
The struct gdbarch_info has the following components:
3078
 
3079
@smallexample
3080
struct gdbarch_info
3081
@{
3082
   const struct bfd_arch_info *bfd_arch_info;
3083
   int                         byte_order;
3084
   bfd                        *abfd;
3085
   struct gdbarch_tdep_info   *tdep_info;
3086
   enum gdb_osabi              osabi;
3087
   const struct target_desc   *target_desc;
3088
@};
3089
@end smallexample
3090
 
3091
@vindex bfd_arch_info
3092
The @code{bfd_arch_info} member holds the key details about the
3093
architecture.  The @code{byte_order} member is a value in an
3094
enumeration indicating the endianism.  The @code{abfd} member is a
3095
pointer to the full @sc{bfd}, the @code{tdep_info} member is
3096
additional custom target specific information, @code{osabi} identifies
3097
which (if any) of a number of operating specific ABIs are used by this
3098
architecture and the @code{target_desc} member is a set of name-value
3099
pairs with information about register usage in this target.
3100
 
3101
When the @code{struct gdbarch} initialization function is called, not
3102
all the fields are provided---only those which can be deduced from the
3103
@sc{bfd}.  The @code{struct gdbarch_info}, @var{info} is used as a
3104
look-up key with the list of existing architectures, @var{arches} to
3105
see if a suitable architecture already exists.  The @var{tdep_info},
3106
@var{osabi} and @var{target_desc} fields may be added before this
3107
lookup to refine the search.
3108
 
3109
Only information in @var{info} should be used to choose the new
3110
architecture.  Historically, @var{info} could be sparse, and
3111
defaults would be collected from the first element on @var{arches}.
3112
However, @value{GDBN} now fills in @var{info} more thoroughly,
3113
so new @code{gdbarch} initialization functions should not take
3114
defaults from @var{arches}.
3115
 
3116
@node Creating a New Architecture
3117
@subsection Creating a New Architecture
3118
@cindex @code{struct gdbarch} creation
3119
 
3120
@findex gdbarch_alloc
3121
@cindex @code{gdbarch_tdep} when allocating new @code{gdbarch}
3122
If no architecture is found, then a new architecture must be created,
3123
by calling @code{gdbarch_alloc} using the supplied @code{@w{struct
3124
gdbarch_info}} and any additional custom target specific
3125
information in a @code{struct gdbarch_tdep}.  The prototype for
3126
@code{gdbarch_alloc} is:
3127
 
3128
@smallexample
3129
struct gdbarch *gdbarch_alloc (const struct gdbarch_info *@var{info},
3130
                               struct gdbarch_tdep       *@var{tdep});
3131
@end smallexample
3132
 
3133
@cindex @code{set_gdbarch} functions
3134
@cindex @code{gdbarch} accessor functions
3135
The newly created struct gdbarch must then be populated.  Although
3136
there are default values, in most cases they are not what is
3137
required.
3138
 
3139
For each element, @var{X}, there is are a pair of corresponding accessor
3140
functions, one to set the value of that element,
3141
@code{set_gdbarch_@var{X}}, the second to either get the value of an
3142
element (if it is a variable) or to apply the element (if it is a
3143
function), @code{gdbarch_@var{X}}.  Note that both accessor functions
3144
take a pointer to the @code{@w{struct gdbarch}} as first
3145
argument.  Populating the new @code{gdbarch} should use the
3146
@code{set_gdbarch} functions.
3147
 
3148
The following sections identify the main elements that should be set
3149
in this way.  This is not the complete list, but represents the
3150
functions and elements that must commonly be specified for a new
3151
architecture.  Many of the functions and variables are described in the
3152
header file @file{gdbarch.h}.
3153
 
3154
This is the main work in defining a new architecture.  Implementing the
3155
set of functions to populate the @code{struct gdbarch}.
3156
 
3157
@cindex @code{gdbarch_tdep} definition
3158
@code{struct gdbarch_tdep} is not defined within @value{GDBN}---it is up
3159
to the user to define this struct if it is needed to hold custom target
3160
information that is not covered by the standard @code{@w{struct
3161
gdbarch}}. For example with the OpenRISC 1000 architecture it is used to
3162
hold the number of matchpoints available in the target (along with other
3163
information).
3164
 
3165
If there is no additional target specific information, it can be set to
3166
@code{NULL}.
3167
 
3168
@node Registers and Memory
3169
@section Registers and Memory
3170
 
3171
@value{GDBN}'s model of the target machine is rather simple.
3172
@value{GDBN} assumes the machine includes a bank of registers and a
3173
block of memory.  Each register may have a different size.
3174
 
3175
@value{GDBN} does not have a magical way to match up with the
3176
compiler's idea of which registers are which; however, it is critical
3177
that they do match up accurately.  The only way to make this work is
3178
to get accurate information about the order that the compiler uses,
3179
and to reflect that in the @code{gdbarch_register_name} and related functions.
3180
 
3181
@value{GDBN} can handle big-endian, little-endian, and bi-endian architectures.
3182
 
3183
@node Pointers and Addresses
3184
@section Pointers Are Not Always Addresses
3185
@cindex pointer representation
3186
@cindex address representation
3187
@cindex word-addressed machines
3188
@cindex separate data and code address spaces
3189
@cindex spaces, separate data and code address
3190
@cindex address spaces, separate data and code
3191
@cindex code pointers, word-addressed
3192
@cindex converting between pointers and addresses
3193
@cindex D10V addresses
3194
 
3195
On almost all 32-bit architectures, the representation of a pointer is
3196
indistinguishable from the representation of some fixed-length number
3197
whose value is the byte address of the object pointed to.  On such
3198
machines, the words ``pointer'' and ``address'' can be used interchangeably.
3199
However, architectures with smaller word sizes are often cramped for
3200
address space, so they may choose a pointer representation that breaks this
3201
identity, and allows a larger code address space.
3202
 
3203
@c D10V is gone from sources - more current example?
3204
 
3205
For example, the Renesas D10V is a 16-bit VLIW processor whose
3206
instructions are 32 bits long@footnote{Some D10V instructions are
3207
actually pairs of 16-bit sub-instructions.  However, since you can't
3208
jump into the middle of such a pair, code addresses can only refer to
3209
full 32 bit instructions, which is what matters in this explanation.}.
3210
If the D10V used ordinary byte addresses to refer to code locations,
3211
then the processor would only be able to address 64kb of instructions.
3212
However, since instructions must be aligned on four-byte boundaries, the
3213
low two bits of any valid instruction's byte address are always
3214
zero---byte addresses waste two bits.  So instead of byte addresses,
3215
the D10V uses word addresses---byte addresses shifted right two bits---to
3216
refer to code.  Thus, the D10V can use 16-bit words to address 256kb of
3217
code space.
3218
 
3219
However, this means that code pointers and data pointers have different
3220
forms on the D10V.  The 16-bit word @code{0xC020} refers to byte address
3221
@code{0xC020} when used as a data address, but refers to byte address
3222
@code{0x30080} when used as a code address.
3223
 
3224
(The D10V also uses separate code and data address spaces, which also
3225
affects the correspondence between pointers and addresses, but we're
3226
going to ignore that here; this example is already too long.)
3227
 
3228
To cope with architectures like this---the D10V is not the only
3229
one!---@value{GDBN} tries to distinguish between @dfn{addresses}, which are
3230
byte numbers, and @dfn{pointers}, which are the target's representation
3231
of an address of a particular type of data.  In the example above,
3232
@code{0xC020} is the pointer, which refers to one of the addresses
3233
@code{0xC020} or @code{0x30080}, depending on the type imposed upon it.
3234
@value{GDBN} provides functions for turning a pointer into an address
3235
and vice versa, in the appropriate way for the current architecture.
3236
 
3237
Unfortunately, since addresses and pointers are identical on almost all
3238
processors, this distinction tends to bit-rot pretty quickly.  Thus,
3239
each time you port @value{GDBN} to an architecture which does
3240
distinguish between pointers and addresses, you'll probably need to
3241
clean up some architecture-independent code.
3242
 
3243
Here are functions which convert between pointers and addresses:
3244
 
3245
@deftypefun CORE_ADDR extract_typed_address (void *@var{buf}, struct type *@var{type})
3246
Treat the bytes at @var{buf} as a pointer or reference of type
3247
@var{type}, and return the address it represents, in a manner
3248
appropriate for the current architecture.  This yields an address
3249
@value{GDBN} can use to read target memory, disassemble, etc.  Note that
3250
@var{buf} refers to a buffer in @value{GDBN}'s memory, not the
3251
inferior's.
3252
 
3253
For example, if the current architecture is the Intel x86, this function
3254
extracts a little-endian integer of the appropriate length from
3255
@var{buf} and returns it.  However, if the current architecture is the
3256
D10V, this function will return a 16-bit integer extracted from
3257
@var{buf}, multiplied by four if @var{type} is a pointer to a function.
3258
 
3259
If @var{type} is not a pointer or reference type, then this function
3260
will signal an internal error.
3261
@end deftypefun
3262
 
3263
@deftypefun CORE_ADDR store_typed_address (void *@var{buf}, struct type *@var{type}, CORE_ADDR @var{addr})
3264
Store the address @var{addr} in @var{buf}, in the proper format for a
3265
pointer of type @var{type} in the current architecture.  Note that
3266
@var{buf} refers to a buffer in @value{GDBN}'s memory, not the
3267
inferior's.
3268
 
3269
For example, if the current architecture is the Intel x86, this function
3270
stores @var{addr} unmodified as a little-endian integer of the
3271
appropriate length in @var{buf}.  However, if the current architecture
3272
is the D10V, this function divides @var{addr} by four if @var{type} is
3273
a pointer to a function, and then stores it in @var{buf}.
3274
 
3275
If @var{type} is not a pointer or reference type, then this function
3276
will signal an internal error.
3277
@end deftypefun
3278
 
3279
@deftypefun CORE_ADDR value_as_address (struct value *@var{val})
3280
Assuming that @var{val} is a pointer, return the address it represents,
3281
as appropriate for the current architecture.
3282
 
3283
This function actually works on integral values, as well as pointers.
3284
For pointers, it performs architecture-specific conversions as
3285
described above for @code{extract_typed_address}.
3286
@end deftypefun
3287
 
3288
@deftypefun CORE_ADDR value_from_pointer (struct type *@var{type}, CORE_ADDR @var{addr})
3289
Create and return a value representing a pointer of type @var{type} to
3290
the address @var{addr}, as appropriate for the current architecture.
3291
This function performs architecture-specific conversions as described
3292
above for @code{store_typed_address}.
3293
@end deftypefun
3294
 
3295
Here are two functions which architectures can define to indicate the
3296
relationship between pointers and addresses.  These have default
3297
definitions, appropriate for architectures on which all pointers are
3298
simple unsigned byte addresses.
3299
 
3300
@deftypefun CORE_ADDR gdbarch_pointer_to_address (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{buf})
3301
Assume that @var{buf} holds a pointer of type @var{type}, in the
3302
appropriate format for the current architecture.  Return the byte
3303
address the pointer refers to.
3304
 
3305
This function may safely assume that @var{type} is either a pointer or a
3306
C@t{++} reference type.
3307
@end deftypefun
3308
 
3309
@deftypefun void gdbarch_address_to_pointer (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{buf}, CORE_ADDR @var{addr})
3310
Store in @var{buf} a pointer of type @var{type} representing the address
3311
@var{addr}, in the appropriate format for the current architecture.
3312
 
3313
This function may safely assume that @var{type} is either a pointer or a
3314
C@t{++} reference type.
3315
@end deftypefun
3316
 
3317
@node Address Classes
3318
@section Address Classes
3319
@cindex address classes
3320
@cindex DW_AT_byte_size
3321
@cindex DW_AT_address_class
3322
 
3323
Sometimes information about different kinds of addresses is available
3324
via the debug information.  For example, some programming environments
3325
define addresses of several different sizes.  If the debug information
3326
distinguishes these kinds of address classes through either the size
3327
info (e.g, @code{DW_AT_byte_size} in @w{DWARF 2}) or through an explicit
3328
address class attribute (e.g, @code{DW_AT_address_class} in @w{DWARF 2}), the
3329
following macros should be defined in order to disambiguate these
3330
types within @value{GDBN} as well as provide the added information to
3331
a @value{GDBN} user when printing type expressions.
3332
 
3333
@deftypefun int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{byte_size}, int @var{dwarf2_addr_class})
3334
Returns the type flags needed to construct a pointer type whose size
3335
is @var{byte_size} and whose address class is @var{dwarf2_addr_class}.
3336
This function is normally called from within a symbol reader.  See
3337
@file{dwarf2read.c}.
3338
@end deftypefun
3339
 
3340
@deftypefun {char *} gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{type_flags})
3341
Given the type flags representing an address class qualifier, return
3342
its name.
3343
@end deftypefun
3344
@deftypefun int gdbarch_address_class_name_to_type_flags (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{name}, int *@var{type_flags_ptr})
3345
Given an address qualifier name, set the @code{int} referenced by @var{type_flags_ptr} to the type flags
3346
for that address class qualifier.
3347
@end deftypefun
3348
 
3349
Since the need for address classes is rather rare, none of
3350
the address class functions are defined by default.  Predicate
3351
functions are provided to detect when they are defined.
3352
 
3353
Consider a hypothetical architecture in which addresses are normally
3354
32-bits wide, but 16-bit addresses are also supported.  Furthermore,
3355
suppose that the @w{DWARF 2} information for this architecture simply
3356
uses a @code{DW_AT_byte_size} value of 2 to indicate the use of one
3357
of these "short" pointers.  The following functions could be defined
3358
to implement the address class functions:
3359
 
3360
@smallexample
3361
somearch_address_class_type_flags (int byte_size,
3362
                                   int dwarf2_addr_class)
3363
@{
3364
  if (byte_size == 2)
3365
    return TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1;
3366
  else
3367
    return 0;
3368
@}
3369
 
3370
static char *
3371
somearch_address_class_type_flags_to_name (int type_flags)
3372
@{
3373
  if (type_flags & TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1)
3374
    return "short";
3375
  else
3376
    return NULL;
3377
@}
3378
 
3379
int
3380
somearch_address_class_name_to_type_flags (char *name,
3381
                                           int *type_flags_ptr)
3382
@{
3383
  if (strcmp (name, "short") == 0)
3384
    @{
3385
      *type_flags_ptr = TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1;
3386
      return 1;
3387
    @}
3388
  else
3389
    return 0;
3390
@}
3391
@end smallexample
3392
 
3393
The qualifier @code{@@short} is used in @value{GDBN}'s type expressions
3394
to indicate the presence of one of these ``short'' pointers.  For
3395
example if the debug information indicates that @code{short_ptr_var} is
3396
one of these short pointers, @value{GDBN} might show the following
3397
behavior:
3398
 
3399
@smallexample
3400
(gdb) ptype short_ptr_var
3401
type = int * @@short
3402
@end smallexample
3403
 
3404
 
3405
@node Register Representation
3406
@section Register Representation
3407
 
3408
@menu
3409
* Raw and Cooked Registers::
3410
* Register Architecture Functions & Variables::
3411
* Register Information Functions::
3412
* Register and Memory Data::
3413
* Register Caching::
3414
@end menu
3415
 
3416
@node Raw and Cooked Registers
3417
@subsection Raw and Cooked Registers
3418
@cindex raw register representation
3419
@cindex cooked register representation
3420
@cindex representations, raw and cooked registers
3421
 
3422
@value{GDBN} considers registers to be a set with members numbered
3423
linearly from 0 upwards.  The first part of that set corresponds to real
3424
physical registers, the second part to any @dfn{pseudo-registers}.
3425
Pseudo-registers have no independent physical existence, but are useful
3426
representations of information within the architecture.  For example the
3427
OpenRISC 1000 architecture has up to 32 general purpose registers, which
3428
are typically represented as 32-bit (or 64-bit) integers.  However the
3429
GPRs are also used as operands to the floating point operations, and it
3430
could be convenient to define a set of pseudo-registers, to show the
3431
GPRs represented as floating point values.
3432
 
3433
For any architecture, the implementer will decide on a mapping from
3434
hardware to @value{GDBN} register numbers.  The registers corresponding to real
3435
hardware are referred to as @dfn{raw} registers, the remaining registers are
3436
@dfn{pseudo-registers}.  The total register set (raw and pseudo) is called
3437
the @dfn{cooked} register set.
3438
 
3439
 
3440
@node Register Architecture Functions & Variables
3441
@subsection Functions and Variables Specifying the Register Architecture
3442
@cindex @code{gdbarch} register architecture functions
3443
 
3444
These @code{struct gdbarch} functions and variables specify the number
3445
and type of registers in the architecture.
3446
 
3447
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} CORE_ADDR read_pc (struct regcache *@var{regcache})
3448
@end deftypefn
3449
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} void write_pc (struct regcache *@var{regcache}, CORE_ADDR @var{val})
3450
 
3451
Read or write the program counter.  The default value of both
3452
functions is @code{NULL} (no function available).  If the program
3453
counter is just an ordinary register, it can be specified in
3454
@code{struct gdbarch} instead (see @code{pc_regnum} below) and it will
3455
be read or written using the standard routines to access registers.  This
3456
function need only be specified if the program counter is not an
3457
ordinary register.
3458
 
3459
Any register information can be obtained using the supplied register
3460
cache, @var{regcache}.  @xref{Register Caching, , Register Caching}.
3461
 
3462
@end deftypefn
3463
 
3464
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} void pseudo_register_read (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct regcache *@var{regcache}, int @var{regnum}, const gdb_byte *@var{buf})
3465
@end deftypefn
3466
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} void pseudo_register_write (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct regcache *@var{regcache}, int @var{regnum}, const gdb_byte *@var{buf})
3467
 
3468
These functions should be defined if there are any pseudo-registers.
3469
The default value is @code{NULL}.  @var{regnum} is the number of the
3470
register to read or write (which will be a @dfn{cooked} register
3471
number) and @var{buf} is the buffer where the value read will be
3472
placed, or from which the value to be written will be taken.  The
3473
value in the buffer may be converted to or from a signed or unsigned
3474
integral value using one of the utility functions (@pxref{Register and
3475
Memory Data, , Using Different Register and Memory Data
3476
Representations}).
3477
 
3478
The access should be for the specified architecture,
3479
@var{gdbarch}.  Any register information can be obtained using the
3480
supplied register cache, @var{regcache}.  @xref{Register Caching, ,
3481
Register Caching}.
3482
 
3483
@end deftypefn
3484
 
3485
@deftypevr {Architecture Variable} int sp_regnum
3486
@vindex sp_regnum
3487
@cindex stack pointer
3488
@cindex @kbd{$sp}
3489
 
3490
This specifies the register holding the stack pointer, which may be a
3491
raw or pseudo-register.  It defaults to -1 (not defined), but it is an
3492
error for it not to be defined.
3493
 
3494
The value of the stack pointer register can be accessed withing
3495
@value{GDBN} as the variable @kbd{$sp}.
3496
 
3497
@end deftypevr
3498
 
3499
@deftypevr {Architecture Variable} int pc_regnum
3500
@vindex pc_regnum
3501
@cindex program counter
3502
@cindex @kbd{$pc}
3503
 
3504
This specifies the register holding the program counter, which may be a
3505
raw or pseudo-register.  It defaults to -1 (not defined).  If
3506
@code{pc_regnum} is not defined, then the functions @code{read_pc} and
3507
@code{write_pc} (see above) must be defined.
3508
 
3509
The value of the program counter (whether defined as a register, or
3510
through @code{read_pc} and @code{write_pc}) can be accessed withing
3511
@value{GDBN} as the variable @kbd{$pc}.
3512
 
3513
@end deftypevr
3514
 
3515
@deftypevr {Architecture Variable} int ps_regnum
3516
@vindex ps_regnum
3517
@cindex processor status register
3518
@cindex status register
3519
@cindex @kbd{$ps}
3520
 
3521
This specifies the register holding the processor status (often called
3522
the status register), which may be a raw or pseudo-register.  It
3523
defaults to -1 (not defined).
3524
 
3525
If defined, the value of this register can be accessed withing
3526
@value{GDBN} as the variable @kbd{$ps}.
3527
 
3528
@end deftypevr
3529
 
3530
@deftypevr {Architecture Variable} int fp0_regnum
3531
@vindex fp0_regnum
3532
@cindex first floating point register
3533
 
3534
This specifies the first floating point register.  It defaults to
3535
0.  @code{fp0_regnum} is not needed unless the target offers support
3536
for floating point.
3537
 
3538
@end deftypevr
3539
 
3540
@node Register Information Functions
3541
@subsection Functions Giving Register Information
3542
@cindex @code{gdbarch} register information functions
3543
 
3544
These functions return information about registers.
3545
 
3546
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} {const char *} register_name (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{regnum})
3547
 
3548
This function should convert a register number (raw or pseudo) to a
3549
register name (as a C @code{const char *}).  This is used both to
3550
determine the name of a register for output and to work out the meaning
3551
of any register names used as input.  The function may also return
3552
@code{NULL}, to indicate that @var{regnum} is not a valid register.
3553
 
3554
For example with the OpenRISC 1000, @value{GDBN} registers 0-31 are the
3555
General Purpose Registers, register 32 is the program counter and
3556
register 33 is the supervision register (i.e.@: the processor status
3557
register), which map to the strings @code{"gpr00"} through
3558
@code{"gpr31"}, @code{"pc"} and @code{"sr"} respectively. This means
3559
that the @value{GDBN} command @kbd{print $gpr5} should print the value of
3560
the OR1K general purpose register 5@footnote{
3561
@cindex frame pointer
3562
@cindex @kbd{$fp}
3563
Historically, @value{GDBN} always had a concept of a frame pointer
3564
register, which could be accessed via the @value{GDBN} variable,
3565
@kbd{$fp}.  That concept is now deprecated, recognizing that not all
3566
architectures have a frame pointer.  However if an architecture does
3567
have a frame pointer register, and defines a register or
3568
pseudo-register with the name @code{"fp"}, then that register will be
3569
used as the value of the @kbd{$fp} variable.}.
3570
 
3571
The default value for this function is @code{NULL}, meaning
3572
undefined. It should always be defined.
3573
 
3574
The access should be for the specified architecture, @var{gdbarch}.
3575
 
3576
@end deftypefn
3577
 
3578
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} {struct type *} register_type (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{regnum})
3579
 
3580
Given a register number, this function identifies the type of data it
3581
may be holding, specified as a @code{struct type}.  @value{GDBN} allows
3582
creation of arbitrary types, but a number of built in types are
3583
provided (@code{builtin_type_void}, @code{builtin_type_int32} etc),
3584
together with functions to derive types from these.
3585
 
3586
Typically the program counter will have a type of ``pointer to
3587
function'' (it points to code), the frame pointer and stack pointer
3588
will have types of ``pointer to void'' (they point to data on the stack)
3589
and all other integer registers will have a type of 32-bit integer or
3590
64-bit integer.
3591
 
3592
This information guides the formatting when displaying register
3593
information.  The default value is @code{NULL} meaning no information is
3594
available to guide formatting when displaying registers.
3595
 
3596
@end deftypefn
3597
 
3598
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} void print_registers_info (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct ui_file *@var{file}, struct frame_info *@var{frame}, int @var{regnum}, int @var{all})
3599
 
3600
Define this function to print out one or all of the registers for the
3601
@value{GDBN} @kbd{info registers} command.  The default value is the
3602
function @code{default_print_registers_info}, which uses the register
3603
type information (see @code{register_type} above) to determine how each
3604
register should be printed.  Define a custom version of this function
3605
for fuller control over how the registers are displayed.
3606
 
3607
The access should be for the specified architecture, @var{gdbarch},
3608
with output to the the file specified by the User Interface
3609
Independent Output file handle, @var{file} (@pxref{UI-Independent
3610
Output, , UI-Independent Output---the @code{ui_out}
3611
Functions}).
3612
 
3613
The registers should show their values in the frame specified by
3614
@var{frame}.  If @var{regnum} is -1 and @var{all} is zero, then all
3615
the ``significant'' registers should be shown (the implementer should
3616
decide which registers are ``significant''). Otherwise only the value of
3617
the register specified by @var{regnum} should be output.  If
3618
@var{regnum} is -1 and @var{all} is non-zero (true), then the value of
3619
all registers should be shown.
3620
 
3621
By default @code{default_print_registers_info} prints one register per
3622
line, and if @var{all} is zero omits floating-point registers.
3623
 
3624
@end deftypefn
3625
 
3626
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} void print_float_info (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct ui_file *@var{file}, struct frame_info *@var{frame}, const char *@var{args})
3627
 
3628
Define this function to provide output about the floating point unit and
3629
registers for the @value{GDBN} @kbd{info float} command respectively.
3630
The default value is @code{NULL} (not defined), meaning no information
3631
will be provided.
3632
 
3633
The @var{gdbarch} and @var{file} and @var{frame} arguments have the same
3634
meaning as in the @code{print_registers_info} function above. The string
3635
@var{args} contains any supplementary arguments to the @kbd{info float}
3636
command.
3637
 
3638
Define this function if the target supports floating point operations.
3639
 
3640
@end deftypefn
3641
 
3642
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} void print_vector_info (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct ui_file *@var{file}, struct frame_info *@var{frame}, const char *@var{args})
3643
 
3644
Define this function to provide output about the vector unit and
3645
registers for the @value{GDBN} @kbd{info vector} command respectively.
3646
The default value is @code{NULL} (not defined), meaning no information
3647
will be provided.
3648
 
3649
The @var{gdbarch}, @var{file} and @var{frame} arguments have the
3650
same meaning as in the @code{print_registers_info} function above.  The
3651
string @var{args} contains any supplementary arguments to the @kbd{info
3652
vector} command.
3653
 
3654
Define this function if the target supports vector operations.
3655
 
3656
@end deftypefn
3657
 
3658
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} int register_reggroup_p (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{regnum}, struct reggroup *@var{group})
3659
 
3660
@value{GDBN} groups registers into different categories (general,
3661
vector, floating point etc).  This function, given a register,
3662
@var{regnum}, and group, @var{group}, returns 1 (true) if the register
3663
is in the group and 0 (false) otherwise.
3664
 
3665
The information should be for the specified architecture,
3666
@var{gdbarch}
3667
 
3668
The default value is the function @code{default_register_reggroup_p}
3669
which will do a reasonable job based on the type of the register (see
3670
the function @code{register_type} above), with groups for general
3671
purpose registers, floating point registers, vector registers and raw
3672
(i.e not pseudo) registers.
3673
 
3674
@end deftypefn
3675
 
3676
@node Register and Memory Data
3677
@subsection Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations
3678
@cindex register representation
3679
@cindex memory representation
3680
@cindex representations, register and memory
3681
@cindex register data formats, converting
3682
@cindex @code{struct value}, converting register contents to
3683
 
3684
Some architectures have different representations of data objects,
3685
depending whether the object is held in a register or memory.  For
3686
example:
3687
 
3688
@itemize @bullet
3689
 
3690
@item
3691
The Alpha architecture can represent 32 bit integer values in
3692
floating-point registers.
3693
 
3694
@item
3695
The x86 architecture supports 80-bit floating-point registers.  The
3696
@code{long double} data type occupies 96 bits in memory but only 80
3697
bits when stored in a register.
3698
 
3699
@end itemize
3700
 
3701
In general, the register representation of a data type is determined by
3702
the architecture, or @value{GDBN}'s interface to the architecture, while
3703
the memory representation is determined by the Application Binary
3704
Interface.
3705
 
3706
For almost all data types on almost all architectures, the two
3707
representations are identical, and no special handling is needed.
3708
However, they do occasionally differ.  An architecture may define the
3709
following @code{struct gdbarch} functions to request conversions
3710
between the register and memory representations of a data type:
3711
 
3712
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} int gdbarch_convert_register_p (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{reg})
3713
 
3714
Return non-zero (true) if the representation of a data value stored in
3715
this register may be different to the representation of that same data
3716
value when stored in memory.  The default value is @code{NULL}
3717
(undefined).
3718
 
3719
If this function is defined and returns non-zero, the @code{struct
3720
gdbarch} functions @code{gdbarch_register_to_value} and
3721
@code{gdbarch_value_to_register} (see below) should be used to perform
3722
any necessary conversion.
3723
 
3724
If defined, this function should return zero for the register's native
3725
type, when no conversion is necessary.
3726
@end deftypefn
3727
 
3728
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} void gdbarch_register_to_value (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, int @var{reg}, struct type *@var{type}, char *@var{from}, char *@var{to})
3729
 
3730
Convert the value of register number @var{reg} to a data object of
3731
type @var{type}.  The buffer at @var{from} holds the register's value
3732
in raw format; the converted value should be placed in the buffer at
3733
@var{to}.
3734
 
3735
@quotation
3736
@emph{Note:} @code{gdbarch_register_to_value} and
3737
@code{gdbarch_value_to_register} take their @var{reg} and @var{type}
3738
arguments in different orders.
3739
@end quotation
3740
 
3741
@code{gdbarch_register_to_value} should only be used with registers
3742
for which the @code{gdbarch_convert_register_p} function returns a
3743
non-zero value.
3744
 
3745
@end deftypefn
3746
 
3747
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} void gdbarch_value_to_register (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct type *@var{type}, int @var{reg}, char *@var{from}, char *@var{to})
3748
 
3749
Convert a data value of type @var{type} to register number @var{reg}'
3750
raw format.
3751
 
3752
@quotation
3753
@emph{Note:} @code{gdbarch_register_to_value} and
3754
@code{gdbarch_value_to_register} take their @var{reg} and @var{type}
3755
arguments in different orders.
3756
@end quotation
3757
 
3758
@code{gdbarch_value_to_register} should only be used with registers
3759
for which the @code{gdbarch_convert_register_p} function returns a
3760
non-zero value.
3761
 
3762
@end deftypefn
3763
 
3764
@node Register Caching
3765
@subsection Register Caching
3766
@cindex register caching
3767
 
3768
Caching of registers is used, so that the target does not need to be
3769
accessed and reanalyzed multiple times for each register in
3770
circumstances where the register value cannot have changed.
3771
 
3772
@cindex @code{struct regcache}
3773
@value{GDBN} provides @code{struct regcache}, associated with a
3774
particular @code{struct gdbarch} to hold the cached values of the raw
3775
registers.  A set of functions is provided to access both the raw
3776
registers (with @code{raw} in their name) and the full set of cooked
3777
registers (with @code{cooked} in their name).  Functions are provided
3778
to ensure the register cache is kept synchronized with the values of
3779
the actual registers in the target.
3780
 
3781
Accessing registers through the @code{struct regcache} routines will
3782
ensure that the appropriate @code{struct gdbarch} functions are called
3783
when necessary to access the underlying target architecture.  In general
3784
users should use the @dfn{cooked} functions, since these will map to the
3785
@dfn{raw} functions automatically as appropriate.
3786
 
3787
@findex regcache_cooked_read
3788
@findex regcache_cooked_write
3789
@cindex @code{gdb_byte}
3790
@findex regcache_cooked_read_signed
3791
@findex regcache_cooked_read_unsigned
3792
@findex regcache_cooked_write_signed
3793
@findex regcache_cooked_write_unsigned
3794
The two key functions are @code{regcache_cooked_read} and
3795
@code{regcache_cooked_write} which read or write a register from or to
3796
a byte buffer (type @code{gdb_byte *}).  For convenience the wrapper
3797
functions @code{regcache_cooked_read_signed},
3798
@code{regcache_cooked_read_unsigned},
3799
@code{regcache_cooked_write_signed} and
3800
@code{regcache_cooked_write_unsigned} are provided, which read or
3801
write the value using the buffer and convert to or from an integral
3802
value as appropriate.
3803
 
3804
@node Frame Interpretation
3805
@section Frame Interpretation
3806
 
3807
@menu
3808
* All About Stack Frames::
3809
* Frame Handling Terminology::
3810
* Prologue Caches::
3811
* Functions and Variable to Analyze Frames::
3812
* Functions to Access Frame Data::
3813
* Analyzing Stacks---Frame Sniffers::
3814
@end menu
3815
 
3816
@node All About Stack Frames
3817
@subsection All About Stack Frames
3818
 
3819
@value{GDBN} needs to understand the stack on which local (automatic)
3820
variables are stored.  The area of the stack containing all the local
3821
variables for a function invocation is known as the @dfn{stack frame}
3822
for that function (or colloquially just as the @dfn{frame}).  In turn the
3823
function that called the function will have its stack frame, and so on
3824
back through the chain of functions that have been called.
3825
 
3826
Almost all architectures have one register dedicated to point to the
3827
end of the stack (the @dfn{stack pointer}).  Many have a second register
3828
which points to the start of the currently active stack frame (the
3829
@dfn{frame pointer}).  The specific arrangements for an architecture are
3830
a key part of the ABI.
3831
 
3832
A diagram helps to explain this.  Here is a simple program to compute
3833
factorials:
3834
 
3835
@smallexample
3836
#include <stdio.h>
3837
int fact (int n)
3838
@{
3839
  if (0 == n)
3840
    @{
3841
      return 1;
3842
    @}
3843
  else
3844
    @{
3845
      return n * fact (n - 1);
3846
    @}
3847
@}
3848
 
3849
main ()
3850
@{
3851
  int i;
3852
 
3853
  for (i = 0; i < 10; i++)
3854
    @{
3855
      int   f = fact (i);
3856
      printf ("%d! = %d\n", i, f);
3857
    @}
3858
@}
3859
@end smallexample
3860
 
3861
Consider the state of the stack when the code reaches line 6 after the
3862
main program has called @code{fact@w{ }(3)}.  The chain of function
3863
calls will be @code{main ()}, @code{fact@w{ }(3)}, @code{fact@w{
3864
}(2)}, @code{@w{fact (1)}} and @code{fact@w{ }(0)}.
3865
 
3866
In this illustration the stack is falling (as used for example by the
3867
OpenRISC 1000 ABI).  The stack pointer (SP) is at the end of the stack
3868
(lowest address) and the frame pointer (FP) is at the highest address
3869
in the current stack frame.  The following diagram shows how the stack
3870
looks.
3871
 
3872
@center @image{stack_frame,14cm}
3873
 
3874
In each stack frame, offset 0 from the stack pointer is the frame
3875
pointer of the previous frame and offset 4 (this is illustrating a
3876
32-bit architecture) from the stack pointer is the return address.
3877
Local variables are indexed from the frame pointer, with negative
3878
indexes.  In the function @code{fact}, offset -4 from the frame
3879
pointer is the argument @var{n}.  In the @code{main} function, offset
3880
-4 from the frame pointer is the local variable @var{i} and offset -8
3881
from the frame pointer is the local variable @var{f}@footnote{This is
3882
a simplified example for illustrative purposes only.  Good optimizing
3883
compilers would not put anything on the stack for such simple
3884
functions.  Indeed they might eliminate the recursion and use of the
3885
stack entirely!}.
3886
 
3887
It is very easy to get confused when examining stacks.  @value{GDBN}
3888
has terminology it uses rigorously throughout.  The stack frame of the
3889
function currently executing, or where execution stopped is numbered
3890
zero.  In this example frame #0 is the stack frame of the call to
3891
@code{fact@w{ }(0)}.  The stack frame of its calling function
3892
(@code{fact@w{ }(1)} in this case) is numbered #1 and so on back
3893
through the chain of calls.
3894
 
3895
The main @value{GDBN} data structure describing frames is
3896
 @code{@w{struct frame_info}}.  It is not used directly, but only via
3897
its accessor functions.  @code{frame_info} includes information about
3898
the registers in the frame and a pointer to the code of the function
3899
with which the frame is associated.  The entire stack is represented as
3900
a linked list of @code{frame_info} structs.
3901
 
3902
@node Frame Handling Terminology
3903
@subsection Frame Handling Terminology
3904
 
3905
It is easy to get confused when referencing stack frames.  @value{GDBN}
3906
uses some precise terminology.
3907
 
3908
@itemize @bullet
3909
 
3910
@item
3911
@cindex THIS frame
3912
@cindex stack frame, definition of THIS frame
3913
@cindex frame, definition of THIS frame
3914
@dfn{THIS} frame is the frame currently under consideration.
3915
 
3916
@item
3917
@cindex NEXT frame
3918
@cindex stack frame, definition of NEXT frame
3919
@cindex frame, definition of NEXT frame
3920
The @dfn{NEXT} frame, also sometimes called the inner or newer frame is the
3921
frame of the function called by the function of THIS frame.
3922
 
3923
@item
3924
@cindex PREVIOUS frame
3925
@cindex stack frame, definition of PREVIOUS frame
3926
@cindex frame, definition of PREVIOUS frame
3927
The @dfn{PREVIOUS} frame, also sometimes called the outer or older frame is
3928
the frame of the function which called the function of THIS frame.
3929
 
3930
@end itemize
3931
 
3932
So in the example in the previous section (@pxref{All About Stack
3933
Frames, , All About Stack Frames}), if THIS frame is #3 (the call to
3934
@code{fact@w{ }(3)}), the NEXT frame is frame #2 (the call to
3935
@code{fact@w{ }(2)}) and the PREVIOUS frame is frame #4 (the call to
3936
@code{main@w{ }()}).
3937
 
3938
@cindex innermost frame
3939
@cindex stack frame, definition of innermost frame
3940
@cindex frame, definition of innermost frame
3941
The @dfn{innermost} frame is the frame of the current executing
3942
function, or where the program stopped, in this example, in the middle
3943
of the call to @code{@w{fact (0))}}.  It is always numbered frame #0.
3944
 
3945
@cindex base of a frame
3946
@cindex stack frame, definition of base of a frame
3947
@cindex frame, definition of base of a frame
3948
The @dfn{base} of a frame is the address immediately before the start
3949
of the NEXT frame.  For a stack which grows down in memory (a
3950
@dfn{falling} stack) this will be the lowest address and for a stack
3951
which grows up in memory (a @dfn{rising} stack) this will be the
3952
highest address in the frame.
3953
 
3954
@value{GDBN} functions to analyze the stack are typically given a
3955
pointer to the NEXT frame to determine information about THIS
3956
frame.  Information about THIS frame includes data on where the
3957
registers of the PREVIOUS frame are stored in this stack frame.  In
3958
this example the frame pointer of the PREVIOUS frame is stored at
3959
offset 0 from the stack pointer of THIS frame.
3960
 
3961
@cindex unwinding
3962
@cindex stack frame, definition of unwinding
3963
@cindex frame, definition of unwinding
3964
The process whereby a function is given a pointer to the NEXT
3965
frame to work out information about THIS frame is referred to as
3966
@dfn{unwinding}.  The @value{GDBN} functions involved in this typically
3967
include unwind in their name.
3968
 
3969
@cindex sniffing
3970
@cindex stack frame, definition of sniffing
3971
@cindex frame, definition of sniffing
3972
The process of analyzing a target to determine the information that
3973
should go in struct frame_info is called @dfn{sniffing}.  The functions
3974
that carry this out are called sniffers and typically include sniffer
3975
in their name.  More than one sniffer may be required to extract all
3976
the information for a particular frame.
3977
 
3978
@cindex sentinel frame
3979
@cindex stack frame, definition of sentinel frame
3980
@cindex frame, definition of sentinel frame
3981
Because so many functions work using the NEXT frame, there is an issue
3982
about addressing the innermost frame---it has no NEXT frame.  To solve
3983
this @value{GDBN} creates a dummy frame #-1, known as the
3984
@dfn{sentinel} frame.
3985
 
3986
@node Prologue Caches
3987
@subsection Prologue Caches
3988
 
3989
@cindex function prologue
3990
@cindex prologue of a function
3991
All the frame sniffing functions typically examine the code at the
3992
start of the corresponding function, to determine the state of
3993
registers.  The ABI will save old values and set new values of key
3994
registers at the start of each function in what is known as the
3995
function @dfn{prologue}.
3996
 
3997
@cindex prologue cache
3998
For any particular stack frame this data does not change, so all the
3999
standard unwinding functions, in addition to receiving a pointer to
4000
the NEXT frame as their first argument, receive a pointer to a
4001
@dfn{prologue cache} as their second argument.  This can be used to store
4002
values associated with a particular frame, for reuse on subsequent
4003
calls involving the same frame.
4004
 
4005
It is up to the user to define the structure used (it is a
4006
@code{void@w{ }*} pointer) and arrange allocation and deallocation of
4007
storage.  However for general use, @value{GDBN} provides
4008
@code{@w{struct trad_frame_cache}}, with a set of accessor
4009
routines.  This structure holds the stack and code address of
4010
THIS frame, the base address of the frame, a pointer to the
4011
struct @code{frame_info} for the NEXT frame and details of
4012
where the registers of the PREVIOUS frame may be found in THIS
4013
frame.
4014
 
4015
Typically the first time any sniffer function is called with NEXT
4016
frame, the prologue sniffer for THIS frame will be @code{NULL}.  The
4017
sniffer will analyze the frame, allocate a prologue cache structure
4018
and populate it.  Subsequent calls using the same NEXT frame will
4019
pass in this prologue cache, so the data can be returned with no
4020
additional analysis.
4021
 
4022
@node Functions and Variable to Analyze Frames
4023
@subsection Functions and Variable to Analyze Frames
4024
 
4025
These struct @code{gdbarch} functions and variable should be defined
4026
to provide analysis of the stack frame and allow it to be adjusted as
4027
required.
4028
 
4029
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} CORE_ADDR skip_prologue (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, CORE_ADDR @var{pc})
4030
 
4031
The prologue of a function is the code at the beginning of the
4032
function which sets up the stack frame, saves the return address
4033
etc.  The code representing the behavior of the function starts after
4034
the prologue.
4035
 
4036
This function skips past the prologue of a function if the program
4037
counter, @var{pc}, is within the prologue of a function.  The result is
4038
the program counter immediately after the prologue.  With modern
4039
optimizing compilers, this may be a far from trivial exercise.  However
4040
the required information may be within the binary as DWARF2 debugging
4041
information, making the job much easier.
4042
 
4043
The default value is @code{NULL} (not defined).  This function should always
4044
be provided, but can take advantage of DWARF2 debugging information,
4045
if that is available.
4046
 
4047
@end deftypefn
4048
 
4049
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} int inner_than (CORE_ADDR @var{lhs}, CORE_ADDR @var{rhs})
4050
@findex core_addr_lessthan
4051
@findex core_addr_greaterthan
4052
 
4053
Given two frame or stack pointers, return non-zero (true) if the first
4054
represents the @dfn{inner} stack frame and 0 (false) otherwise.  This
4055
is used to determine whether the target has a stack which grows up in
4056
memory (rising stack) or grows down in memory (falling stack).
4057
@xref{All About Stack Frames, , All About Stack Frames}, for an
4058
explanation of @dfn{inner} frames.
4059
 
4060
The default value of this function is @code{NULL} and it should always
4061
be defined.  However for almost all architectures one of the built-in
4062
functions can be used: @code{core_addr_lessthan} (for stacks growing
4063
down in memory) or @code{core_addr_greaterthan} (for stacks growing up
4064
in memory).
4065
 
4066
@end deftypefn
4067
 
4068
@anchor{frame_align}
4069
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} CORE_ADDR frame_align (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, CORE_ADDR @var{address})
4070
@findex align_down
4071
@findex align_up
4072
 
4073
The architecture may have constraints on how its frames are
4074
aligned.  For example the OpenRISC 1000 ABI requires stack frames to be
4075
double-word aligned, but 32-bit versions of the architecture allocate
4076
single-word values to the stack.  Thus extra padding may be needed at
4077
the end of a stack frame.
4078
 
4079
Given a proposed address for the stack pointer, this function
4080
returns a suitably aligned address (by expanding the stack frame).
4081
 
4082
The default value is @code{NULL} (undefined).  This function should be defined
4083
for any architecture where it is possible the stack could become
4084
misaligned.  The utility functions @code{align_down} (for falling
4085
stacks) and @code{align_up} (for rising stacks) will facilitate the
4086
implementation of this function.
4087
 
4088
@end deftypefn
4089
 
4090
@deftypevr {Architecture Variable} int frame_red_zone_size
4091
 
4092
Some ABIs reserve space beyond the end of the stack for use by leaf
4093
functions without prologue or epilogue or by exception handlers (for
4094
example the OpenRISC 1000).
4095
 
4096
This is known as a @dfn{red zone} (AMD terminology).  The @sc{amd64}
4097
(nee x86-64) ABI documentation refers to the @dfn{red zone} when
4098
describing this scratch area.
4099
 
4100
The default value is 0.  Set this field if the architecture has such a
4101
red zone.  The value must be aligned as required by the ABI (see
4102
@code{frame_align} above for an explanation of stack frame alignment).
4103
 
4104
@end deftypevr
4105
 
4106
@node Functions to Access Frame Data
4107
@subsection Functions to Access Frame Data
4108
 
4109
These functions provide access to key registers and arguments in the
4110
stack frame.
4111
 
4112
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} CORE_ADDR unwind_pc (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct frame_info *@var{next_frame})
4113
 
4114
This function is given a pointer to the NEXT stack frame (@pxref{All
4115
About Stack Frames, , All About Stack Frames}, for how frames are
4116
represented) and returns the value of the program counter in the
4117
PREVIOUS frame (i.e.@: the frame of the function that called THIS
4118
one).  This is commonly referred to as the @dfn{return address}.
4119
 
4120
The implementation, which must be frame agnostic (work with any frame),
4121
is typically no more than:
4122
 
4123
@smallexample
4124
ULONGEST pc;
4125
pc = frame_unwind_register_unsigned (next_frame, @var{ARCH}_PC_REGNUM);
4126
return gdbarch_addr_bits_remove (gdbarch, pc);
4127
@end smallexample
4128
 
4129
@end deftypefn
4130
 
4131
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} CORE_ADDR unwind_sp (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct frame_info *@var{next_frame})
4132
 
4133
This function is given a pointer to the NEXT stack frame
4134
(@pxref{All About Stack Frames, , All About Stack Frames} for how
4135
frames are represented) and returns the value of the stack pointer in
4136
the PREVIOUS frame (i.e.@: the frame of the function that called
4137
THIS one).
4138
 
4139
The implementation, which must be frame agnostic (work with any frame),
4140
is typically no more than:
4141
 
4142
@smallexample
4143
ULONGEST sp;
4144
sp = frame_unwind_register_unsigned (next_frame, @var{ARCH}_SP_REGNUM);
4145
return gdbarch_addr_bits_remove (gdbarch, sp);
4146
@end smallexample
4147
 
4148
@end deftypefn
4149
 
4150
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} int frame_num_args (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct frame_info *@var{this_frame})
4151
 
4152
This function is given a pointer to THIS stack frame (@pxref{All
4153
About Stack Frames, , All About Stack Frames} for how frames are
4154
represented), and returns the number of arguments that are being
4155
passed, or -1 if not known.
4156
 
4157
The default value is @code{NULL} (undefined), in which case the number of
4158
arguments passed on any stack frame is always unknown.  For many
4159
architectures this will be a suitable default.
4160
 
4161
@end deftypefn
4162
 
4163
@node Analyzing Stacks---Frame Sniffers
4164
@subsection Analyzing Stacks---Frame Sniffers
4165
 
4166
When a program stops, @value{GDBN} needs to construct the chain of
4167
struct @code{frame_info} representing the state of the stack using
4168
appropriate @dfn{sniffers}.
4169
 
4170
Each architecture requires appropriate sniffers, but they do not form
4171
entries in @code{@w{struct gdbarch}}, since more than one sniffer may
4172
be required and a sniffer may be suitable for more than one
4173
@code{@w{struct gdbarch}}.  Instead sniffers are associated with
4174
architectures using the following functions.
4175
 
4176
@itemize @bullet
4177
 
4178
@item
4179
@findex frame_unwind_append_sniffer
4180
@code{frame_unwind_append_sniffer} is used to add a new sniffer to
4181
analyze THIS frame when given a pointer to the NEXT frame.
4182
 
4183
@item
4184
@findex frame_base_append_sniffer
4185
@code{frame_base_append_sniffer} is used to add a new sniffer
4186
which can determine information about the base of a stack frame.
4187
 
4188
@item
4189
@findex frame_base_set_default
4190
@code{frame_base_set_default} is used to specify the default base
4191
sniffer.
4192
 
4193
@end itemize
4194
 
4195
These functions all take a reference to @code{@w{struct gdbarch}}, so
4196
they are associated with a specific architecture.  They are usually
4197
called in the @code{gdbarch} initialization function, after the
4198
@code{gdbarch} struct has been set up.  Unless a default has been set, the
4199
most recently appended sniffer will be tried first.
4200
 
4201
The main frame unwinding sniffer (as set by
4202
@code{frame_unwind_append_sniffer)} returns a structure specifying
4203
a set of sniffing functions:
4204
 
4205
@cindex @code{frame_unwind}
4206
@smallexample
4207
struct frame_unwind
4208
@{
4209
   enum frame_type            type;
4210
   frame_this_id_ftype       *this_id;
4211
   frame_prev_register_ftype *prev_register;
4212
   const struct frame_data   *unwind_data;
4213
   frame_sniffer_ftype       *sniffer;
4214
   frame_prev_pc_ftype       *prev_pc;
4215
   frame_dealloc_cache_ftype *dealloc_cache;
4216
@};
4217
@end smallexample
4218
 
4219
The @code{type} field indicates the type of frame this sniffer can
4220
handle: normal, dummy (@pxref{Functions Creating Dummy Frames, ,
4221
Functions Creating Dummy Frames}), signal handler or sentinel.  Signal
4222
handlers sometimes have their own simplified stack structure for
4223
efficiency, so may need their own handlers.
4224
 
4225
The @code{unwind_data} field holds additional information which may be
4226
relevant to particular types of frame.  For example it may hold
4227
additional information for signal handler frames.
4228
 
4229
The remaining fields define functions that yield different types of
4230
information when given a pointer to the NEXT stack frame.  Not all
4231
functions need be provided.  If an entry is @code{NULL}, the next sniffer will
4232
be tried instead.
4233
 
4234
@itemize @bullet
4235
 
4236
@item
4237
@code{this_id} determines the stack pointer and function (code
4238
entry point) for THIS stack frame.
4239
 
4240
@item
4241
@code{prev_register} determines where the values of registers for
4242
the PREVIOUS stack frame are stored in THIS stack frame.
4243
 
4244
@item
4245
@code{sniffer} takes a look at THIS frame's registers to
4246
determine if this is the appropriate unwinder.
4247
 
4248
@item
4249
@code{prev_pc} determines the program counter for THIS
4250
frame.  Only needed if the program counter is not an ordinary register
4251
(@pxref{Register Architecture Functions & Variables,
4252
, Functions and Variables Specifying the Register Architecture}).
4253
 
4254
@item
4255
@code{dealloc_cache} frees any additional memory associated with
4256
the prologue cache for this frame (@pxref{Prologue Caches, , Prologue
4257
Caches}).
4258
 
4259
@end itemize
4260
 
4261
In general it is only the @code{this_id} and @code{prev_register}
4262
fields that need be defined for custom sniffers.
4263
 
4264
The frame base sniffer is much simpler.  It is a @code{@w{struct
4265
frame_base}}, which refers to the corresponding @code{frame_unwind}
4266
struct and whose fields refer to functions yielding various addresses
4267
within the frame.
4268
 
4269
@cindex @code{frame_base}
4270
@smallexample
4271
struct frame_base
4272
@{
4273
   const struct frame_unwind *unwind;
4274
   frame_this_base_ftype     *this_base;
4275
   frame_this_locals_ftype   *this_locals;
4276
   frame_this_args_ftype     *this_args;
4277
@};
4278
@end smallexample
4279
 
4280
All the functions referred to take a pointer to the NEXT frame as
4281
argument. The function referred to by @code{this_base} returns the
4282
base address of THIS frame, the function referred to by
4283
@code{this_locals} returns the base address of local variables in THIS
4284
frame and the function referred to by @code{this_args} returns the
4285
base address of the function arguments in this frame.
4286
 
4287
As described above, the base address of a frame is the address
4288
immediately before the start of the NEXT frame.  For a falling
4289
stack, this is the lowest address in the frame and for a rising stack
4290
it is the highest address in the frame.  For most architectures the
4291
same address is also the base address for local variables and
4292
arguments, in which case the same function can be used for all three
4293
entries@footnote{It is worth noting that if it cannot be determined in any
4294
other way (for example by there being a register with the name
4295
@code{"fp"}), then the result of the @code{this_base} function will be
4296
used as the value of the frame pointer variable @kbd{$fp} in
4297
@value{GDBN}.  This is very often not correct (for example with the
4298
OpenRISC 1000, this value is the stack pointer, @kbd{$sp}).  In this
4299
case a register (raw or pseudo) with the name @code{"fp"} should be
4300
defined.  It will be used in preference as the value of @kbd{$fp}.}.
4301
 
4302
@node Inferior Call Setup
4303
@section Inferior Call Setup
4304
@cindex calls to the inferior
4305
 
4306
@menu
4307
* About Dummy Frames::
4308
* Functions Creating Dummy Frames::
4309
@end menu
4310
 
4311
@node About Dummy Frames
4312
@subsection About Dummy Frames
4313
@cindex dummy frames
4314
 
4315
@value{GDBN} can call functions in the target code (for example by
4316
using the @kbd{call} or @kbd{print} commands).  These functions may be
4317
breakpointed, and it is essential that if a function does hit a
4318
breakpoint, commands like @kbd{backtrace} work correctly.
4319
 
4320
This is achieved by making the stack look as though the function had
4321
been called from the point where @value{GDBN} had previously stopped.
4322
This requires that @value{GDBN} can set up stack frames appropriate for
4323
such function calls.
4324
 
4325
@node Functions Creating Dummy Frames
4326
@subsection Functions Creating Dummy Frames
4327
 
4328
The following functions provide the functionality to set up such
4329
@dfn{dummy} stack frames.
4330
 
4331
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} CORE_ADDR push_dummy_call (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct value *@var{function}, struct regcache *@var{regcache}, CORE_ADDR @var{bp_addr}, int  @var{nargs}, struct value **@var{args}, CORE_ADDR @var{sp}, int  @var{struct_return}, CORE_ADDR @var{struct_addr})
4332
 
4333
This function sets up a dummy stack frame for the function about to be
4334
called.  @code{push_dummy_call} is given the arguments to be passed
4335
and must copy them into registers or push them on to the stack as
4336
appropriate for the ABI.
4337
 
4338
@var{function} is a pointer to the function
4339
that will be called and @var{regcache} the register cache from which
4340
values should be obtained.  @var{bp_addr} is the address to which the
4341
function should return (which is breakpointed, so @value{GDBN} can
4342
regain control, hence the name).  @var{nargs} is the number of
4343
arguments to pass and @var{args} an array containing the argument
4344
values.  @var{struct_return} is non-zero (true) if the function returns
4345
a structure, and if so @var{struct_addr} is the address in which the
4346
structure should be returned.
4347
 
4348
 After calling this function, @value{GDBN} will pass control to the
4349
target at the address of the function, which will find the stack and
4350
registers set up just as expected.
4351
 
4352
The default value of this function is @code{NULL} (undefined).  If the
4353
function is not defined, then @value{GDBN} will not allow the user to
4354
call functions within the target being debugged.
4355
 
4356
@end deftypefn
4357
 
4358
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} {struct frame_id} unwind_dummy_id (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct frame_info *@var{next_frame})
4359
 
4360
This is the inverse of @code{push_dummy_call} which restores the stack
4361
pointer and program counter after a call to evaluate a function using
4362
a dummy stack frame.  The result is a @code{@w{struct frame_id}}, which
4363
contains the value of the stack pointer and program counter to be
4364
used.
4365
 
4366
The NEXT frame pointer is provided as argument,
4367
@var{next_frame}.  THIS frame is the frame of the dummy function,
4368
which can be unwound, to yield the required stack pointer and program
4369
counter from the PREVIOUS frame.
4370
 
4371
The default value is @code{NULL} (undefined).  If @code{push_dummy_call} is
4372
defined, then this function should also be defined.
4373
 
4374
@end deftypefn
4375
 
4376
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} CORE_ADDR push_dummy_code (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, CORE_ADDR @var{sp}, CORE_ADDR @var{funaddr}, struct value **@var{args}, int  @var{nargs}, struct type *@var{value_type}, CORE_ADDR *@var{real_pc}, CORE_ADDR *@var{bp_addr}, struct regcache *@var{regcache})
4377
 
4378
If this function is not defined (its default value is @code{NULL}), a dummy
4379
call will use the entry point of the currently loaded code on the
4380
target as its return address.  A temporary breakpoint will be set
4381
there, so the location must be writable and have room for a
4382
breakpoint.
4383
 
4384
It is possible that this default is not suitable.  It might not be
4385
writable (in ROM possibly), or the ABI might require code to be
4386
executed on return from a call to unwind the stack before the
4387
breakpoint is encountered.
4388
 
4389
If either of these is the case, then push_dummy_code should be defined
4390
to push an instruction sequence onto the end of the stack to which the
4391
dummy call should return.
4392
 
4393
The arguments are essentially the same as those to
4394
@code{push_dummy_call}.  However the function is provided with the
4395
type of the function result, @var{value_type}, @var{bp_addr} is used
4396
to return a value (the address at which the breakpoint instruction
4397
should be inserted) and @var{real pc} is used to specify the resume
4398
address when starting the call sequence.  The function should return
4399
the updated innermost stack address.
4400
 
4401
@quotation
4402
@emph{Note:} This does require that code in the stack can be executed.
4403
Some Harvard architectures may not allow this.
4404
@end quotation
4405
 
4406
@end deftypefn
4407
 
4408
@node Adding support for debugging core files
4409
@section Adding support for debugging core files
4410
@cindex core files
4411
 
4412
The prerequisite for adding core file support in @value{GDBN} is to have
4413
core file support in BFD.
4414
 
4415
Once BFD support is available, writing the apropriate
4416
@code{regset_from_core_section} architecture function should be all
4417
that is needed in order to add support for core files in @value{GDBN}.
4418
 
4419
@node Defining Other Architecture Features
4420
@section Defining Other Architecture Features
4421
 
4422
This section describes other functions and values in @code{gdbarch},
4423
together with some useful macros, that you can use to define the
4424
target architecture.
4425
 
4426
@table @code
4427
 
4428
@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_addr_bits_remove (@var{gdbarch}, @var{addr})
4429
@findex gdbarch_addr_bits_remove
4430
If a raw machine instruction address includes any bits that are not
4431
really part of the address, then this function is used to zero those bits in
4432
@var{addr}.  This is only used for addresses of instructions, and even then not
4433
in all contexts.
4434
 
4435
For example, the two low-order bits of the PC on the Hewlett-Packard PA
4436
2.0 architecture contain the privilege level of the corresponding
4437
instruction.  Since instructions must always be aligned on four-byte
4438
boundaries, the processor masks out these bits to generate the actual
4439
address of the instruction.  @code{gdbarch_addr_bits_remove} would then for
4440
example look like that:
4441
@smallexample
4442
arch_addr_bits_remove (CORE_ADDR addr)
4443
@{
4444
  return (addr &= ~0x3);
4445
@}
4446
@end smallexample
4447
 
4448
@item int address_class_name_to_type_flags (@var{gdbarch}, @var{name}, @var{type_flags_ptr})
4449
@findex address_class_name_to_type_flags
4450
If @var{name} is a valid address class qualifier name, set the @code{int}
4451
referenced by @var{type_flags_ptr} to the mask representing the qualifier
4452
and return 1.  If @var{name} is not a valid address class qualifier name,
4453
return 0.
4454
 
4455
The value for @var{type_flags_ptr} should be one of
4456
@code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1}, @code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_2}, or
4457
possibly some combination of these values or'd together.
4458
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Address Classes}.
4459
 
4460
@item int address_class_name_to_type_flags_p (@var{gdbarch})
4461
@findex address_class_name_to_type_flags_p
4462
Predicate which indicates whether @code{address_class_name_to_type_flags}
4463
has been defined.
4464
 
4465
@item int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags (@var{gdbarch}, @var{byte_size}, @var{dwarf2_addr_class})
4466
@findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags
4467
Given a pointers byte size (as described by the debug information) and
4468
the possible @code{DW_AT_address_class} value, return the type flags
4469
used by @value{GDBN} to represent this address class.  The value
4470
returned should be one of @code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_1},
4471
@code{TYPE_FLAG_ADDRESS_CLASS_2}, or possibly some combination of these
4472
values or'd together.
4473
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Address Classes}.
4474
 
4475
@item int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_p (@var{gdbarch})
4476
@findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_p
4477
Predicate which indicates whether @code{gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_p} has
4478
been defined.
4479
 
4480
@item const char *gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type_flags})
4481
@findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name
4482
Return the name of the address class qualifier associated with the type
4483
flags given by @var{type_flags}.
4484
 
4485
@item int gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name_p (@var{gdbarch})
4486
@findex gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name_p
4487
Predicate which indicates whether @code{gdbarch_address_class_type_flags_to_name} has been defined.
4488
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Address Classes}.
4489
 
4490
@item void gdbarch_address_to_pointer (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type}, @var{buf}, @var{addr})
4491
@findex gdbarch_address_to_pointer
4492
Store in @var{buf} a pointer of type @var{type} representing the address
4493
@var{addr}, in the appropriate format for the current architecture.
4494
This function may safely assume that @var{type} is either a pointer or a
4495
C@t{++} reference type.
4496
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Pointers Are Not Always Addresses}.
4497
 
4498
@item int gdbarch_believe_pcc_promotion (@var{gdbarch})
4499
@findex gdbarch_believe_pcc_promotion
4500
Used to notify if the compiler promotes a @code{short} or @code{char}
4501
parameter to an @code{int}, but still reports the parameter as its
4502
original type, rather than the promoted type.
4503
 
4504
@item gdbarch_bits_big_endian (@var{gdbarch})
4505
@findex gdbarch_bits_big_endian
4506
This is used if the numbering of bits in the targets does @strong{not} match
4507
the endianism of the target byte order.  A value of 1 means that the bits
4508
are numbered in a big-endian bit order, 0 means little-endian.
4509
 
4510
@item set_gdbarch_bits_big_endian (@var{gdbarch}, @var{bits_big_endian})
4511
@findex set_gdbarch_bits_big_endian
4512
Calling set_gdbarch_bits_big_endian with a value of 1 indicates that the
4513
bits in the target are numbered in a big-endian bit order, 0 indicates
4514
little-endian.
4515
 
4516
@item BREAKPOINT
4517
@findex BREAKPOINT
4518
This is the character array initializer for the bit pattern to put into
4519
memory where a breakpoint is set.  Although it's common to use a trap
4520
instruction for a breakpoint, it's not required; for instance, the bit
4521
pattern could be an invalid instruction.  The breakpoint must be no
4522
longer than the shortest instruction of the architecture.
4523
 
4524
@code{BREAKPOINT} has been deprecated in favor of
4525
@code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc}.
4526
 
4527
@item BIG_BREAKPOINT
4528
@itemx LITTLE_BREAKPOINT
4529
@findex LITTLE_BREAKPOINT
4530
@findex BIG_BREAKPOINT
4531
Similar to BREAKPOINT, but used for bi-endian targets.
4532
 
4533
@code{BIG_BREAKPOINT} and @code{LITTLE_BREAKPOINT} have been deprecated in
4534
favor of @code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc}.
4535
 
4536
@item const gdb_byte *gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc (@var{gdbarch}, @var{pcptr}, @var{lenptr})
4537
@findex gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc
4538
@anchor{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc} Use the program counter to determine the
4539
contents and size of a breakpoint instruction.  It returns a pointer to
4540
a static string of bytes that encode a breakpoint instruction, stores the
4541
length of the string to @code{*@var{lenptr}}, and adjusts the program
4542
counter (if necessary) to point to the actual memory location where the
4543
breakpoint should be inserted.  May return @code{NULL} to indicate that
4544
software breakpoints are not supported.
4545
 
4546
Although it is common to use a trap instruction for a breakpoint, it's
4547
not required; for instance, the bit pattern could be an invalid
4548
instruction.  The breakpoint must be no longer than the shortest
4549
instruction of the architecture.
4550
 
4551
Provided breakpoint bytes can be also used by @code{bp_loc_is_permanent} to
4552
detect permanent breakpoints.  @code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc} should return
4553
an unchanged memory copy if it was called for a location with permanent
4554
breakpoint as some architectures use breakpoint instructions containing
4555
arbitrary parameter value.
4556
 
4557
Replaces all the other @var{BREAKPOINT} macros.
4558
 
4559
@item int gdbarch_memory_insert_breakpoint (@var{gdbarch}, @var{bp_tgt})
4560
@itemx gdbarch_memory_remove_breakpoint (@var{gdbarch}, @var{bp_tgt})
4561
@findex gdbarch_memory_remove_breakpoint
4562
@findex gdbarch_memory_insert_breakpoint
4563
Insert or remove memory based breakpoints.  Reasonable defaults
4564
(@code{default_memory_insert_breakpoint} and
4565
@code{default_memory_remove_breakpoint} respectively) have been
4566
provided so that it is not necessary to set these for most
4567
architectures.  Architectures which may want to set
4568
@code{gdbarch_memory_insert_breakpoint} and @code{gdbarch_memory_remove_breakpoint} will likely have instructions that are oddly sized or are not stored in a
4569
conventional manner.
4570
 
4571
It may also be desirable (from an efficiency standpoint) to define
4572
custom breakpoint insertion and removal routines if
4573
@code{gdbarch_breakpoint_from_pc} needs to read the target's memory for some
4574
reason.
4575
 
4576
@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_adjust_breakpoint_address (@var{gdbarch}, @var{bpaddr})
4577
@findex gdbarch_adjust_breakpoint_address
4578
@cindex breakpoint address adjusted
4579
Given an address at which a breakpoint is desired, return a breakpoint
4580
address adjusted to account for architectural constraints on
4581
breakpoint placement.  This method is not needed by most targets.
4582
 
4583
The FR-V target (see @file{frv-tdep.c}) requires this method.
4584
The FR-V is a VLIW architecture in which a number of RISC-like
4585
instructions are grouped (packed) together into an aggregate
4586
instruction or instruction bundle.  When the processor executes
4587
one of these bundles, the component instructions are executed
4588
in parallel.
4589
 
4590
In the course of optimization, the compiler may group instructions
4591
from distinct source statements into the same bundle.  The line number
4592
information associated with one of the latter statements will likely
4593
refer to some instruction other than the first one in the bundle.  So,
4594
if the user attempts to place a breakpoint on one of these latter
4595
statements, @value{GDBN} must be careful to @emph{not} place the break
4596
instruction on any instruction other than the first one in the bundle.
4597
(Remember though that the instructions within a bundle execute
4598
in parallel, so the @emph{first} instruction is the instruction
4599
at the lowest address and has nothing to do with execution order.)
4600
 
4601
The FR-V's @code{gdbarch_adjust_breakpoint_address} method will adjust a
4602
breakpoint's address by scanning backwards for the beginning of
4603
the bundle, returning the address of the bundle.
4604
 
4605
Since the adjustment of a breakpoint may significantly alter a user's
4606
expectation, @value{GDBN} prints a warning when an adjusted breakpoint
4607
is initially set and each time that that breakpoint is hit.
4608
 
4609
@item int gdbarch_call_dummy_location (@var{gdbarch})
4610
@findex gdbarch_call_dummy_location
4611
See the file @file{inferior.h}.
4612
 
4613
This method has been replaced by @code{gdbarch_push_dummy_code}
4614
(@pxref{gdbarch_push_dummy_code}).
4615
 
4616
@item int gdbarch_cannot_fetch_register (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regum})
4617
@findex gdbarch_cannot_fetch_register
4618
This function should return nonzero if @var{regno} cannot be fetched
4619
from an inferior process.
4620
 
4621
@item int gdbarch_cannot_store_register (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regnum})
4622
@findex gdbarch_cannot_store_register
4623
This function should return nonzero if @var{regno} should not be
4624
written to the target.  This is often the case for program counters,
4625
status words, and other special registers.  This function returns 0 as
4626
default so that @value{GDBN} will assume that all registers may be written.
4627
 
4628
@item int gdbarch_convert_register_p (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regnum}, struct type *@var{type})
4629
@findex gdbarch_convert_register_p
4630
Return non-zero if register @var{regnum} represents data values of type
4631
@var{type} in a non-standard form.
4632
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations}.
4633
 
4634
@item int gdbarch_fp0_regnum (@var{gdbarch})
4635
@findex gdbarch_fp0_regnum
4636
This function returns the number of the first floating point register,
4637
if the machine has such registers.  Otherwise, it returns -1.
4638
 
4639
@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_decr_pc_after_break (@var{gdbarch})
4640
@findex gdbarch_decr_pc_after_break
4641
This function shall return the amount by which to decrement the PC after the
4642
program encounters a breakpoint.  This is often the number of bytes in
4643
@code{BREAKPOINT}, though not always.  For most targets this value will be 0.
4644
 
4645
@item DISABLE_UNSETTABLE_BREAK (@var{addr})
4646
@findex DISABLE_UNSETTABLE_BREAK
4647
If defined, this should evaluate to 1 if @var{addr} is in a shared
4648
library in which breakpoints cannot be set and so should be disabled.
4649
 
4650
@item int gdbarch_dwarf2_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{dwarf2_regnr})
4651
@findex gdbarch_dwarf2_reg_to_regnum
4652
Convert DWARF2 register number @var{dwarf2_regnr} into @value{GDBN} regnum.
4653
If not defined, no conversion will be performed.
4654
 
4655
@item int gdbarch_ecoff_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{ecoff_regnr})
4656
@findex gdbarch_ecoff_reg_to_regnum
4657
Convert ECOFF register number  @var{ecoff_regnr} into @value{GDBN} regnum.  If
4658
not defined, no conversion will be performed.
4659
 
4660
@item GCC_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
4661
@itemx GCC2_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
4662
@findex GCC2_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
4663
@findex GCC_COMPILED_FLAG_SYMBOL
4664
If defined, these are the names of the symbols that @value{GDBN} will
4665
look for to detect that GCC compiled the file.  The default symbols
4666
are @code{gcc_compiled.} and @code{gcc2_compiled.},
4667
respectively.  (Currently only defined for the Delta 68.)
4668
 
4669
@item gdbarch_get_longjmp_target
4670
@findex gdbarch_get_longjmp_target
4671
This function determines the target PC address that @code{longjmp}
4672
will jump to, assuming that we have just stopped at a @code{longjmp}
4673
breakpoint.  It takes a @code{CORE_ADDR *} as argument, and stores the
4674
target PC value through this pointer.  It examines the current state
4675
of the machine as needed, typically by using a manually-determined
4676
offset into the @code{jmp_buf}.  (While we might like to get the offset
4677
from the target's @file{jmpbuf.h}, that header file cannot be assumed
4678
to be available when building a cross-debugger.)
4679
 
4680
@item DEPRECATED_IBM6000_TARGET
4681
@findex DEPRECATED_IBM6000_TARGET
4682
Shows that we are configured for an IBM RS/6000 system.  This
4683
conditional should be eliminated (FIXME) and replaced by
4684
feature-specific macros.  It was introduced in haste and we are
4685
repenting at leisure.
4686
 
4687
@item I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS
4688
An x86-based target can define this to use the generic x86 watchpoint
4689
support; see @ref{Algorithms, I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS}.
4690
 
4691
@item gdbarch_in_function_epilogue_p (@var{gdbarch}, @var{addr})
4692
@findex gdbarch_in_function_epilogue_p
4693
Returns non-zero if the given @var{addr} is in the epilogue of a function.
4694
The epilogue of a function is defined as the part of a function where
4695
the stack frame of the function already has been destroyed up to the
4696
final `return from function call' instruction.
4697
 
4698
@item int gdbarch_in_solib_return_trampoline (@var{gdbarch}, @var{pc}, @var{name})
4699
@findex gdbarch_in_solib_return_trampoline
4700
Define this function to return nonzero if the program is stopped in the
4701
trampoline that returns from a shared library.
4702
 
4703
@item target_so_ops.in_dynsym_resolve_code (@var{pc})
4704
@findex in_dynsym_resolve_code
4705
Define this to return nonzero if the program is stopped in the
4706
dynamic linker.
4707
 
4708
@item SKIP_SOLIB_RESOLVER (@var{pc})
4709
@findex SKIP_SOLIB_RESOLVER
4710
Define this to evaluate to the (nonzero) address at which execution
4711
should continue to get past the dynamic linker's symbol resolution
4712
function.  A zero value indicates that it is not important or necessary
4713
to set a breakpoint to get through the dynamic linker and that single
4714
stepping will suffice.
4715
 
4716
@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_integer_to_address (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type}, @var{buf})
4717
@findex gdbarch_integer_to_address
4718
@cindex converting integers to addresses
4719
Define this when the architecture needs to handle non-pointer to address
4720
conversions specially.  Converts that value to an address according to
4721
the current architectures conventions.
4722
 
4723
@emph{Pragmatics: When the user copies a well defined expression from
4724
their source code and passes it, as a parameter, to @value{GDBN}'s
4725
@code{print} command, they should get the same value as would have been
4726
computed by the target program.  Any deviation from this rule can cause
4727
major confusion and annoyance, and needs to be justified carefully.  In
4728
other words, @value{GDBN} doesn't really have the freedom to do these
4729
conversions in clever and useful ways.  It has, however, been pointed
4730
out that users aren't complaining about how @value{GDBN} casts integers
4731
to pointers; they are complaining that they can't take an address from a
4732
disassembly listing and give it to @code{x/i}.  Adding an architecture
4733
method like @code{gdbarch_integer_to_address} certainly makes it possible for
4734
@value{GDBN} to ``get it right'' in all circumstances.}
4735
 
4736
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Pointers Are Not Always
4737
Addresses}.
4738
 
4739
@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_pointer_to_address (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type}, @var{buf})
4740
@findex gdbarch_pointer_to_address
4741
Assume that @var{buf} holds a pointer of type @var{type}, in the
4742
appropriate format for the current architecture.  Return the byte
4743
address the pointer refers to.
4744
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Pointers Are Not Always Addresses}.
4745
 
4746
@item void gdbarch_register_to_value(@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame}, @var{regnum}, @var{type}, @var{fur})
4747
@findex gdbarch_register_to_value
4748
Convert the raw contents of register @var{regnum} into a value of type
4749
@var{type}.
4750
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations}.
4751
 
4752
@item REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL(@var{reg}, @var{type}, @var{from}, @var{to})
4753
@findex REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_VIRTUAL
4754
Convert the value of register @var{reg} from its raw form to its virtual
4755
form.
4756
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
4757
 
4758
@item REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW(@var{type}, @var{reg}, @var{from}, @var{to})
4759
@findex REGISTER_CONVERT_TO_RAW
4760
Convert the value of register @var{reg} from its virtual form to its raw
4761
form.
4762
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Raw and Virtual Register Representations}.
4763
 
4764
@item const struct regset *regset_from_core_section (struct gdbarch * @var{gdbarch}, const char * @var{sect_name}, size_t @var{sect_size})
4765
@findex regset_from_core_section
4766
Return the appropriate register set for a core file section with name
4767
@var{sect_name} and size @var{sect_size}.
4768
 
4769
@item SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP_P()
4770
@findex SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP_P
4771
Define this as 1 if the target does not have a hardware single-step
4772
mechanism.  The macro @code{SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP} must also be defined.
4773
 
4774
@item SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP(@var{signal}, @var{insert_breakpoints_p})
4775
@findex SOFTWARE_SINGLE_STEP
4776
A function that inserts or removes (depending on
4777
@var{insert_breakpoints_p}) breakpoints at each possible destinations of
4778
the next instruction.  See @file{sparc-tdep.c} and @file{rs6000-tdep.c}
4779
for examples.
4780
 
4781
@item set_gdbarch_sofun_address_maybe_missing (@var{gdbarch}, @var{set})
4782
@findex set_gdbarch_sofun_address_maybe_missing
4783
Somebody clever observed that, the more actual addresses you have in the
4784
debug information, the more time the linker has to spend relocating
4785
them.  So whenever there's some other way the debugger could find the
4786
address it needs, you should omit it from the debug info, to make
4787
linking faster.
4788
 
4789
Calling @code{set_gdbarch_sofun_address_maybe_missing} with a non-zero
4790
argument @var{set} indicates that a particular set of hacks of this sort
4791
are in use, affecting @code{N_SO} and @code{N_FUN} entries in stabs-format
4792
debugging information.  @code{N_SO} stabs mark the beginning and ending
4793
addresses of compilation units in the text segment.  @code{N_FUN} stabs
4794
mark the starts and ends of functions.
4795
 
4796
In this case, @value{GDBN} assumes two things:
4797
 
4798
@itemize @bullet
4799
@item
4800
@code{N_FUN} stabs have an address of zero.  Instead of using those
4801
addresses, you should find the address where the function starts by
4802
taking the function name from the stab, and then looking that up in the
4803
minsyms (the linker/assembler symbol table).  In other words, the stab
4804
has the name, and the linker/assembler symbol table is the only place
4805
that carries the address.
4806
 
4807
@item
4808
@code{N_SO} stabs have an address of zero, too.  You just look at the
4809
@code{N_FUN} stabs that appear before and after the @code{N_SO} stab, and
4810
guess the starting and ending addresses of the compilation unit from them.
4811
@end itemize
4812
 
4813
@item int gdbarch_stabs_argument_has_addr (@var{gdbarch}, @var{type})
4814
@findex gdbarch_stabs_argument_has_addr
4815
@anchor{gdbarch_stabs_argument_has_addr} Define this function to return
4816
nonzero if a function argument of type @var{type} is passed by reference
4817
instead of value.
4818
 
4819
@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_push_dummy_call (@var{gdbarch}, @var{function}, @var{regcache}, @var{bp_addr}, @var{nargs}, @var{args}, @var{sp}, @var{struct_return}, @var{struct_addr})
4820
@findex gdbarch_push_dummy_call
4821
@anchor{gdbarch_push_dummy_call} Define this to push the dummy frame's call to
4822
the inferior function onto the stack.  In addition to pushing @var{nargs}, the
4823
code should push @var{struct_addr} (when @var{struct_return} is non-zero), and
4824
the return address (@var{bp_addr}).
4825
 
4826
@var{function} is a pointer to a @code{struct value}; on architectures that use
4827
function descriptors, this contains the function descriptor value.
4828
 
4829
Returns the updated top-of-stack pointer.
4830
 
4831
@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_push_dummy_code (@var{gdbarch}, @var{sp}, @var{funaddr}, @var{using_gcc}, @var{args}, @var{nargs}, @var{value_type}, @var{real_pc}, @var{bp_addr}, @var{regcache})
4832
@findex gdbarch_push_dummy_code
4833
@anchor{gdbarch_push_dummy_code} Given a stack based call dummy, push the
4834
instruction sequence (including space for a breakpoint) to which the
4835
called function should return.
4836
 
4837
Set @var{bp_addr} to the address at which the breakpoint instruction
4838
should be inserted, @var{real_pc} to the resume address when starting
4839
the call sequence, and return the updated inner-most stack address.
4840
 
4841
By default, the stack is grown sufficient to hold a frame-aligned
4842
(@pxref{frame_align}) breakpoint, @var{bp_addr} is set to the address
4843
reserved for that breakpoint, and @var{real_pc} set to @var{funaddr}.
4844
 
4845
This method replaces @w{@code{gdbarch_call_dummy_location (@var{gdbarch})}}.
4846
 
4847
@item int gdbarch_sdb_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{sdb_regnr})
4848
@findex gdbarch_sdb_reg_to_regnum
4849
Use this function to convert sdb register @var{sdb_regnr} into @value{GDBN}
4850
regnum.  If not defined, no conversion will be done.
4851
 
4852
@item enum return_value_convention gdbarch_return_value (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct type *@var{valtype}, struct regcache *@var{regcache}, void *@var{readbuf}, const void *@var{writebuf})
4853
@findex gdbarch_return_value
4854
@anchor{gdbarch_return_value} Given a function with a return-value of
4855
type @var{rettype}, return which return-value convention that function
4856
would use.
4857
 
4858
@value{GDBN} currently recognizes two function return-value conventions:
4859
@code{RETURN_VALUE_REGISTER_CONVENTION} where the return value is found
4860
in registers; and @code{RETURN_VALUE_STRUCT_CONVENTION} where the return
4861
value is found in memory and the address of that memory location is
4862
passed in as the function's first parameter.
4863
 
4864
If the register convention is being used, and @var{writebuf} is
4865
non-@code{NULL}, also copy the return-value in @var{writebuf} into
4866
@var{regcache}.
4867
 
4868
If the register convention is being used, and @var{readbuf} is
4869
non-@code{NULL}, also copy the return value from @var{regcache} into
4870
@var{readbuf} (@var{regcache} contains a copy of the registers from the
4871
just returned function).
4872
 
4873
@emph{Maintainer note: This method replaces separate predicate, extract,
4874
store methods.  By having only one method, the logic needed to determine
4875
the return-value convention need only be implemented in one place.  If
4876
@value{GDBN} were written in an @sc{oo} language, this method would
4877
instead return an object that knew how to perform the register
4878
return-value extract and store.}
4879
 
4880
@emph{Maintainer note: This method does not take a @var{gcc_p}
4881
parameter, and such a parameter should not be added.  If an architecture
4882
that requires per-compiler or per-function information be identified,
4883
then the replacement of @var{rettype} with @code{struct value}
4884
@var{function} should be pursued.}
4885
 
4886
@emph{Maintainer note: The @var{regcache} parameter limits this methods
4887
to the inner most frame.  While replacing @var{regcache} with a
4888
@code{struct frame_info} @var{frame} parameter would remove that
4889
limitation there has yet to be a demonstrated need for such a change.}
4890
 
4891
@item void gdbarch_skip_permanent_breakpoint (@var{gdbarch}, @var{regcache})
4892
@findex gdbarch_skip_permanent_breakpoint
4893
Advance the inferior's PC past a permanent breakpoint.  @value{GDBN} normally
4894
steps over a breakpoint by removing it, stepping one instruction, and
4895
re-inserting the breakpoint.  However, permanent breakpoints are
4896
hardwired into the inferior, and can't be removed, so this strategy
4897
doesn't work.  Calling @code{gdbarch_skip_permanent_breakpoint} adjusts the
4898
processor's state so that execution will resume just after the breakpoint.
4899
This function does the right thing even when the breakpoint is in the delay slot
4900
of a branch or jump.
4901
 
4902
@item CORE_ADDR gdbarch_skip_trampoline_code (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame}, @var{pc})
4903
@findex gdbarch_skip_trampoline_code
4904
If the target machine has trampoline code that sits between callers and
4905
the functions being called, then define this function to return a new PC
4906
that is at the start of the real function.
4907
 
4908
@item int gdbarch_deprecated_fp_regnum (@var{gdbarch})
4909
@findex gdbarch_deprecated_fp_regnum
4910
If the frame pointer is in a register, use this function to return the
4911
number of that register.
4912
 
4913
@item int gdbarch_stab_reg_to_regnum (@var{gdbarch}, @var{stab_regnr})
4914
@findex gdbarch_stab_reg_to_regnum
4915
Use this function to convert stab register @var{stab_regnr} into @value{GDBN}
4916
regnum.  If not defined, no conversion will be done.
4917
 
4918
@item SYMBOL_RELOADING_DEFAULT
4919
@findex SYMBOL_RELOADING_DEFAULT
4920
The default value of the ``symbol-reloading'' variable.  (Never defined in
4921
current sources.)
4922
 
4923
@item TARGET_CHAR_BIT
4924
@findex TARGET_CHAR_BIT
4925
Number of bits in a char; defaults to 8.
4926
 
4927
@item int gdbarch_char_signed (@var{gdbarch})
4928
@findex gdbarch_char_signed
4929
Non-zero if @code{char} is normally signed on this architecture; zero if
4930
it should be unsigned.
4931
 
4932
The ISO C standard requires the compiler to treat @code{char} as
4933
equivalent to either @code{signed char} or @code{unsigned char}; any
4934
character in the standard execution set is supposed to be positive.
4935
Most compilers treat @code{char} as signed, but @code{char} is unsigned
4936
on the IBM S/390, RS6000, and PowerPC targets.
4937
 
4938
@item int gdbarch_double_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4939
@findex gdbarch_double_bit
4940
Number of bits in a double float; defaults to @w{@code{8 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4941
 
4942
@item int gdbarch_float_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4943
@findex gdbarch_float_bit
4944
Number of bits in a float; defaults to @w{@code{4 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4945
 
4946
@item int gdbarch_int_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4947
@findex gdbarch_int_bit
4948
Number of bits in an integer; defaults to @w{@code{4 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4949
 
4950
@item int gdbarch_long_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4951
@findex gdbarch_long_bit
4952
Number of bits in a long integer; defaults to @w{@code{4 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4953
 
4954
@item int gdbarch_long_double_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4955
@findex gdbarch_long_double_bit
4956
Number of bits in a long double float;
4957
defaults to @w{@code{2 * gdbarch_double_bit (@var{gdbarch})}}.
4958
 
4959
@item int gdbarch_long_long_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4960
@findex gdbarch_long_long_bit
4961
Number of bits in a long long integer; defaults to
4962
@w{@code{2 * gdbarch_long_bit (@var{gdbarch})}}.
4963
 
4964
@item int gdbarch_ptr_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4965
@findex gdbarch_ptr_bit
4966
Number of bits in a pointer; defaults to
4967
@w{@code{gdbarch_int_bit (@var{gdbarch})}}.
4968
 
4969
@item int gdbarch_short_bit (@var{gdbarch})
4970
@findex gdbarch_short_bit
4971
Number of bits in a short integer; defaults to @w{@code{2 * TARGET_CHAR_BIT}}.
4972
 
4973
@item void gdbarch_virtual_frame_pointer (@var{gdbarch}, @var{pc}, @var{frame_regnum}, @var{frame_offset})
4974
@findex gdbarch_virtual_frame_pointer
4975
Returns a @code{(@var{register}, @var{offset})} pair representing the virtual
4976
frame pointer in use at the code address @var{pc}.  If virtual frame
4977
pointers are not used, a default definition simply returns
4978
@code{gdbarch_deprecated_fp_regnum} (or @code{gdbarch_sp_regnum}, if
4979
no frame pointer is defined), with an offset of zero.
4980
 
4981
@c need to explain virtual frame pointers, they are recorded in agent
4982
@c expressions for tracepoints
4983
 
4984
@item TARGET_HAS_HARDWARE_WATCHPOINTS
4985
If non-zero, the target has support for hardware-assisted
4986
watchpoints.  @xref{Algorithms, watchpoints}, for more details and
4987
other related macros.
4988
 
4989
@item int gdbarch_print_insn (@var{gdbarch}, @var{vma}, @var{info})
4990
@findex gdbarch_print_insn
4991
This is the function used by @value{GDBN} to print an assembly
4992
instruction.  It prints the instruction at address @var{vma} in
4993
debugged memory and returns the length of the instruction, in bytes.
4994
This usually points to a function in the @code{opcodes} library
4995
(@pxref{Support Libraries, ,Opcodes}).  @var{info} is a structure (of
4996
type @code{disassemble_info}) defined in the header file
4997
@file{include/dis-asm.h}, and used to pass information to the
4998
instruction decoding routine.
4999
 
5000
@item frame_id gdbarch_dummy_id (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame})
5001
@findex gdbarch_dummy_id
5002
@anchor{gdbarch_dummy_id} Given @var{frame} return a @w{@code{struct
5003
frame_id}} that uniquely identifies an inferior function call's dummy
5004
frame.  The value returned must match the dummy frame stack value
5005
previously saved by @code{call_function_by_hand}.
5006
 
5007
@item void gdbarch_value_to_register (@var{gdbarch}, @var{frame}, @var{type}, @var{buf})
5008
@findex gdbarch_value_to_register
5009
Convert a value of type @var{type} into the raw contents of a register.
5010
@xref{Target Architecture Definition, , Using Different Register and Memory Data Representations}.
5011
 
5012
@end table
5013
 
5014
Motorola M68K target conditionals.
5015
 
5016
@ftable @code
5017
@item BPT_VECTOR
5018
Define this to be the 4-bit location of the breakpoint trap vector.  If
5019
not defined, it will default to @code{0xf}.
5020
 
5021
@item REMOTE_BPT_VECTOR
5022
Defaults to @code{1}.
5023
 
5024
@end ftable
5025
 
5026
@node Adding a New Target
5027
@section Adding a New Target
5028
 
5029
@cindex adding a target
5030
The following files add a target to @value{GDBN}:
5031
 
5032
@table @file
5033
@cindex target dependent files
5034
 
5035
@item gdb/@var{ttt}-tdep.c
5036
Contains any miscellaneous code required for this target machine.  On
5037
some machines it doesn't exist at all.
5038
 
5039
@item gdb/@var{arch}-tdep.c
5040
@itemx gdb/@var{arch}-tdep.h
5041
This is required to describe the basic layout of the target machine's
5042
processor chip (registers, stack, etc.).  It can be shared among many
5043
targets that use the same processor architecture.
5044
 
5045
@end table
5046
 
5047
(Target header files such as
5048
@file{gdb/config/@var{arch}/tm-@var{ttt}.h},
5049
@file{gdb/config/@var{arch}/tm-@var{arch}.h}, and
5050
@file{config/tm-@var{os}.h} are no longer used.)
5051
 
5052
@findex _initialize_@var{arch}_tdep
5053
A @value{GDBN} description for a new architecture, arch is created by
5054
defining a global function @code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep}, by
5055
convention in the source file @file{@var{arch}-tdep.c}.  For
5056
example, in the case of the OpenRISC 1000, this function is called
5057
@code{_initialize_or1k_tdep} and is found in the file
5058
@file{or1k-tdep.c}.
5059
 
5060
The object file resulting from compiling this source file, which will
5061
contain the implementation of the
5062
@code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep} function is specified in the
5063
@value{GDBN} @file{configure.tgt} file, which includes a large case
5064
statement pattern matching against the @code{--target} option of the
5065
@kbd{configure} script.
5066
 
5067
@quotation
5068
@emph{Note:} If the architecture requires multiple source files, the
5069
corresponding binaries should be included in
5070
@file{configure.tgt}. However if there are header files, the
5071
dependencies on these will not be picked up from the entries in
5072
@file{configure.tgt}. The @file{Makefile.in} file will need extending to
5073
show these dependencies.
5074
@end quotation
5075
 
5076
@findex gdbarch_register
5077
A new struct gdbarch, defining the new architecture, is created within
5078
the @code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep} function by calling
5079
@code{gdbarch_register}:
5080
 
5081
@smallexample
5082
void gdbarch_register (enum bfd_architecture    architecture,
5083
                       gdbarch_init_ftype      *init_func,
5084
                       gdbarch_dump_tdep_ftype *tdep_dump_func);
5085
@end smallexample
5086
 
5087
This function has been described fully in an earlier
5088
section.  @xref{How an Architecture is Represented, , How an
5089
Architecture is Represented}.
5090
 
5091
The new @code{@w{struct gdbarch}} should contain implementations of
5092
the necessary functions (described in the previous sections) to
5093
describe the basic layout of the target machine's processor chip
5094
(registers, stack, etc.).  It can be shared among many targets that use
5095
the same processor architecture.
5096
 
5097
@node Target Descriptions
5098
@chapter Target Descriptions
5099
@cindex target descriptions
5100
 
5101
The target architecture definition (@pxref{Target Architecture Definition})
5102
contains @value{GDBN}'s hard-coded knowledge about an architecture.  For
5103
some platforms, it is handy to have more flexible knowledge about a specific
5104
instance of the architecture---for instance, a processor or development board.
5105
@dfn{Target descriptions} provide a mechanism for the user to tell @value{GDBN}
5106
more about what their target supports, or for the target to tell @value{GDBN}
5107
directly.
5108
 
5109
For details on writing, automatically supplying, and manually selecting
5110
target descriptions, see @ref{Target Descriptions, , , gdb,
5111
Debugging with @value{GDBN}}.  This section will cover some related
5112
topics about the @value{GDBN} internals.
5113
 
5114
@menu
5115
* Target Descriptions Implementation::
5116
* Adding Target Described Register Support::
5117
@end menu
5118
 
5119
@node Target Descriptions Implementation
5120
@section Target Descriptions Implementation
5121
@cindex target descriptions, implementation
5122
 
5123
Before @value{GDBN} connects to a new target, or runs a new program on
5124
an existing target, it discards any existing target description and
5125
reverts to a default gdbarch.  Then, after connecting, it looks for a
5126
new target description by calling @code{target_find_description}.
5127
 
5128
A description may come from a user specified file (XML), the remote
5129
@samp{qXfer:features:read} packet (also XML), or from any custom
5130
@code{to_read_description} routine in the target vector.  For instance,
5131
the remote target supports guessing whether a MIPS target is 32-bit or
5132
64-bit based on the size of the @samp{g} packet.
5133
 
5134
If any target description is found, @value{GDBN} creates a new gdbarch
5135
incorporating the description by calling @code{gdbarch_update_p}.  Any
5136
@samp{<architecture>} element is handled first, to determine which
5137
architecture's gdbarch initialization routine is called to create the
5138
new architecture.  Then the initialization routine is called, and has
5139
a chance to adjust the constructed architecture based on the contents
5140
of the target description.  For instance, it can recognize any
5141
properties set by a @code{to_read_description} routine.  Also
5142
see @ref{Adding Target Described Register Support}.
5143
 
5144
@node Adding Target Described Register Support
5145
@section Adding Target Described Register Support
5146
@cindex target descriptions, adding register support
5147
 
5148
Target descriptions can report additional registers specific to an
5149
instance of the target.  But it takes a little work in the architecture
5150
specific routines to support this.
5151
 
5152
A target description must either have no registers or a complete
5153
set---this avoids complexity in trying to merge standard registers
5154
with the target defined registers.  It is the architecture's
5155
responsibility to validate that a description with registers has
5156
everything it needs.  To keep architecture code simple, the same
5157
mechanism is used to assign fixed internal register numbers to
5158
standard registers.
5159
 
5160
If @code{tdesc_has_registers} returns 1, the description contains
5161
registers.  The architecture's @code{gdbarch_init} routine should:
5162
 
5163
@itemize @bullet
5164
 
5165
@item
5166
Call @code{tdesc_data_alloc} to allocate storage, early, before
5167
searching for a matching gdbarch or allocating a new one.
5168
 
5169
@item
5170
Use @code{tdesc_find_feature} to locate standard features by name.
5171
 
5172
@item
5173
Use @code{tdesc_numbered_register} and @code{tdesc_numbered_register_choices}
5174
to locate the expected registers in the standard features.
5175
 
5176
@item
5177
Return @code{NULL} if a required feature is missing, or if any standard
5178
feature is missing expected registers.  This will produce a warning that
5179
the description was incomplete.
5180
 
5181
@item
5182
Free the allocated data before returning, unless @code{tdesc_use_registers}
5183
is called.
5184
 
5185
@item
5186
Call @code{set_gdbarch_num_regs} as usual, with a number higher than any
5187
fixed number passed to @code{tdesc_numbered_register}.
5188
 
5189
@item
5190
Call @code{tdesc_use_registers} after creating a new gdbarch, before
5191
returning it.
5192
 
5193
@end itemize
5194
 
5195
After @code{tdesc_use_registers} has been called, the architecture's
5196
@code{register_name}, @code{register_type}, and @code{register_reggroup_p}
5197
routines will not be called; that information will be taken from
5198
the target description.  @code{num_regs} may be increased to account
5199
for any additional registers in the description.
5200
 
5201
Pseudo-registers require some extra care:
5202
 
5203
@itemize @bullet
5204
 
5205
@item
5206
Using @code{tdesc_numbered_register} allows the architecture to give
5207
constant register numbers to standard architectural registers, e.g.@:
5208
as an @code{enum} in @file{@var{arch}-tdep.h}.  But because
5209
pseudo-registers are always numbered above @code{num_regs},
5210
which may be increased by the description, constant numbers
5211
can not be used for pseudos.  They must be numbered relative to
5212
@code{num_regs} instead.
5213
 
5214
@item
5215
The description will not describe pseudo-registers, so the
5216
architecture must call @code{set_tdesc_pseudo_register_name},
5217
@code{set_tdesc_pseudo_register_type}, and
5218
@code{set_tdesc_pseudo_register_reggroup_p} to supply routines
5219
describing pseudo registers.  These routines will be passed
5220
internal register numbers, so the same routines used for the
5221
gdbarch equivalents are usually suitable.
5222
 
5223
@end itemize
5224
 
5225
 
5226
@node Target Vector Definition
5227
 
5228
@chapter Target Vector Definition
5229
@cindex target vector
5230
 
5231
The target vector defines the interface between @value{GDBN}'s
5232
abstract handling of target systems, and the nitty-gritty code that
5233
actually exercises control over a process or a serial port.
5234
@value{GDBN} includes some 30-40 different target vectors; however,
5235
each configuration of @value{GDBN} includes only a few of them.
5236
 
5237
@menu
5238
* Managing Execution State::
5239
* Existing Targets::
5240
@end menu
5241
 
5242
@node Managing Execution State
5243
@section Managing Execution State
5244
@cindex execution state
5245
 
5246
A target vector can be completely inactive (not pushed on the target
5247
stack), active but not running (pushed, but not connected to a fully
5248
manifested inferior), or completely active (pushed, with an accessible
5249
inferior).  Most targets are only completely inactive or completely
5250
active, but some support persistent connections to a target even
5251
when the target has exited or not yet started.
5252
 
5253
For example, connecting to the simulator using @code{target sim} does
5254
not create a running program.  Neither registers nor memory are
5255
accessible until @code{run}.  Similarly, after @code{kill}, the
5256
program can not continue executing.  But in both cases @value{GDBN}
5257
remains connected to the simulator, and target-specific commands
5258
are directed to the simulator.
5259
 
5260
A target which only supports complete activation should push itself
5261
onto the stack in its @code{to_open} routine (by calling
5262
@code{push_target}), and unpush itself from the stack in its
5263
@code{to_mourn_inferior} routine (by calling @code{unpush_target}).
5264
 
5265
A target which supports both partial and complete activation should
5266
still call @code{push_target} in @code{to_open}, but not call
5267
@code{unpush_target} in @code{to_mourn_inferior}.  Instead, it should
5268
call either @code{target_mark_running} or @code{target_mark_exited}
5269
in its @code{to_open}, depending on whether the target is fully active
5270
after connection.  It should also call @code{target_mark_running} any
5271
time the inferior becomes fully active (e.g.@: in
5272
@code{to_create_inferior} and @code{to_attach}), and
5273
@code{target_mark_exited} when the inferior becomes inactive (in
5274
@code{to_mourn_inferior}).  The target should also make sure to call
5275
@code{target_mourn_inferior} from its @code{to_kill}, to return the
5276
target to inactive state.
5277
 
5278
@node Existing Targets
5279
@section Existing Targets
5280
@cindex targets
5281
 
5282
@subsection File Targets
5283
 
5284
Both executables and core files have target vectors.
5285
 
5286
@subsection Standard Protocol and Remote Stubs
5287
 
5288
@value{GDBN}'s file @file{remote.c} talks a serial protocol to code that
5289
runs in the target system.  @value{GDBN} provides several sample
5290
@dfn{stubs} that can be integrated into target programs or operating
5291
systems for this purpose; they are named @file{@var{cpu}-stub.c}.  Many
5292
operating systems, embedded targets, emulators, and simulators already
5293
have a @value{GDBN} stub built into them, and maintenance of the remote
5294
protocol must be careful to preserve compatibility.
5295
 
5296
The @value{GDBN} user's manual describes how to put such a stub into
5297
your target code.  What follows is a discussion of integrating the
5298
SPARC stub into a complicated operating system (rather than a simple
5299
program), by Stu Grossman, the author of this stub.
5300
 
5301
The trap handling code in the stub assumes the following upon entry to
5302
@code{trap_low}:
5303
 
5304
@enumerate
5305
@item
5306
%l1 and %l2 contain pc and npc respectively at the time of the trap;
5307
 
5308
@item
5309
traps are disabled;
5310
 
5311
@item
5312
you are in the correct trap window.
5313
@end enumerate
5314
 
5315
As long as your trap handler can guarantee those conditions, then there
5316
is no reason why you shouldn't be able to ``share'' traps with the stub.
5317
The stub has no requirement that it be jumped to directly from the
5318
hardware trap vector.  That is why it calls @code{exceptionHandler()},
5319
which is provided by the external environment.  For instance, this could
5320
set up the hardware traps to actually execute code which calls the stub
5321
first, and then transfers to its own trap handler.
5322
 
5323
For the most point, there probably won't be much of an issue with
5324
``sharing'' traps, as the traps we use are usually not used by the kernel,
5325
and often indicate unrecoverable error conditions.  Anyway, this is all
5326
controlled by a table, and is trivial to modify.  The most important
5327
trap for us is for @code{ta 1}.  Without that, we can't single step or
5328
do breakpoints.  Everything else is unnecessary for the proper operation
5329
of the debugger/stub.
5330
 
5331
From reading the stub, it's probably not obvious how breakpoints work.
5332
They are simply done by deposit/examine operations from @value{GDBN}.
5333
 
5334
@subsection ROM Monitor Interface
5335
 
5336
@subsection Custom Protocols
5337
 
5338
@subsection Transport Layer
5339
 
5340
@subsection Builtin Simulator
5341
 
5342
 
5343
@node Native Debugging
5344
 
5345
@chapter Native Debugging
5346
@cindex native debugging
5347
 
5348
Several files control @value{GDBN}'s configuration for native support:
5349
 
5350
@table @file
5351
@vindex NATDEPFILES
5352
@item gdb/config/@var{arch}/@var{xyz}.mh
5353
Specifies Makefile fragments needed by a @emph{native} configuration on
5354
machine @var{xyz}.  In particular, this lists the required
5355
native-dependent object files, by defining @samp{NATDEPFILES=@dots{}}.
5356
Also specifies the header file which describes native support on
5357
@var{xyz}, by defining @samp{NAT_FILE= nm-@var{xyz}.h}.  You can also
5358
define @samp{NAT_CFLAGS}, @samp{NAT_ADD_FILES}, @samp{NAT_CLIBS},
5359
@samp{NAT_CDEPS}, @samp{NAT_GENERATED_FILES}, etc.; see @file{Makefile.in}.
5360
 
5361
@emph{Maintainer's note: The @file{.mh} suffix is because this file
5362
originally contained @file{Makefile} fragments for hosting @value{GDBN}
5363
on machine @var{xyz}.  While the file is no longer used for this
5364
purpose, the @file{.mh} suffix remains.  Perhaps someone will
5365
eventually rename these fragments so that they have a @file{.mn}
5366
suffix.}
5367
 
5368
@item gdb/config/@var{arch}/nm-@var{xyz}.h
5369
(@file{nm.h} is a link to this file, created by @code{configure}).  Contains C
5370
macro definitions describing the native system environment, such as
5371
child process control and core file support.
5372
 
5373
@item gdb/@var{xyz}-nat.c
5374
Contains any miscellaneous C code required for this native support of
5375
this machine.  On some machines it doesn't exist at all.
5376
@end table
5377
 
5378
There are some ``generic'' versions of routines that can be used by
5379
various systems.  These can be customized in various ways by macros
5380
defined in your @file{nm-@var{xyz}.h} file.  If these routines work for
5381
the @var{xyz} host, you can just include the generic file's name (with
5382
@samp{.o}, not @samp{.c}) in @code{NATDEPFILES}.
5383
 
5384
Otherwise, if your machine needs custom support routines, you will need
5385
to write routines that perform the same functions as the generic file.
5386
Put them into @file{@var{xyz}-nat.c}, and put @file{@var{xyz}-nat.o}
5387
into @code{NATDEPFILES}.
5388
 
5389
@table @file
5390
@item inftarg.c
5391
This contains the @emph{target_ops vector} that supports Unix child
5392
processes on systems which use ptrace and wait to control the child.
5393
 
5394
@item procfs.c
5395
This contains the @emph{target_ops vector} that supports Unix child
5396
processes on systems which use /proc to control the child.
5397
 
5398
@item fork-child.c
5399
This does the low-level grunge that uses Unix system calls to do a ``fork
5400
and exec'' to start up a child process.
5401
 
5402
@item infptrace.c
5403
This is the low level interface to inferior processes for systems using
5404
the Unix @code{ptrace} call in a vanilla way.
5405
@end table
5406
 
5407
@section ptrace
5408
 
5409
@section /proc
5410
 
5411
@section win32
5412
 
5413
@section shared libraries
5414
 
5415
@section Native Conditionals
5416
@cindex native conditionals
5417
 
5418
When @value{GDBN} is configured and compiled, various macros are
5419
defined or left undefined, to control compilation when the host and
5420
target systems are the same.  These macros should be defined (or left
5421
undefined) in @file{nm-@var{system}.h}.
5422
 
5423
@table @code
5424
 
5425
@item I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS
5426
An x86-based machine can define this to use the generic x86 watchpoint
5427
support; see @ref{Algorithms, I386_USE_GENERIC_WATCHPOINTS}.
5428
 
5429
@item SOLIB_ADD (@var{filename}, @var{from_tty}, @var{targ}, @var{readsyms})
5430
@findex SOLIB_ADD
5431
Define this to expand into an expression that will cause the symbols in
5432
@var{filename} to be added to @value{GDBN}'s symbol table.  If
5433
@var{readsyms} is zero symbols are not read but any necessary low level
5434
processing for @var{filename} is still done.
5435
 
5436
@item SOLIB_CREATE_INFERIOR_HOOK
5437
@findex SOLIB_CREATE_INFERIOR_HOOK
5438
Define this to expand into any shared-library-relocation code that you
5439
want to be run just after the child process has been forked.
5440
 
5441
@item START_INFERIOR_TRAPS_EXPECTED
5442
@findex START_INFERIOR_TRAPS_EXPECTED
5443
When starting an inferior, @value{GDBN} normally expects to trap
5444
twice; once when
5445
the shell execs, and once when the program itself execs.  If the actual
5446
number of traps is something other than 2, then define this macro to
5447
expand into the number expected.
5448
 
5449
@end table
5450
 
5451
@node Support Libraries
5452
 
5453
@chapter Support Libraries
5454
 
5455
@section BFD
5456
@cindex BFD library
5457
 
5458
BFD provides support for @value{GDBN} in several ways:
5459
 
5460
@table @emph
5461
@item identifying executable and core files
5462
BFD will identify a variety of file types, including a.out, coff, and
5463
several variants thereof, as well as several kinds of core files.
5464
 
5465
@item access to sections of files
5466
BFD parses the file headers to determine the names, virtual addresses,
5467
sizes, and file locations of all the various named sections in files
5468
(such as the text section or the data section).  @value{GDBN} simply
5469
calls BFD to read or write section @var{x} at byte offset @var{y} for
5470
length @var{z}.
5471
 
5472
@item specialized core file support
5473
BFD provides routines to determine the failing command name stored in a
5474
core file, the signal with which the program failed, and whether a core
5475
file matches (i.e.@: could be a core dump of) a particular executable
5476
file.
5477
 
5478
@item locating the symbol information
5479
@value{GDBN} uses an internal interface of BFD to determine where to find the
5480
symbol information in an executable file or symbol-file.  @value{GDBN} itself
5481
handles the reading of symbols, since BFD does not ``understand'' debug
5482
symbols, but @value{GDBN} uses BFD's cached information to find the symbols,
5483
string table, etc.
5484
@end table
5485
 
5486
@section opcodes
5487
@cindex opcodes library
5488
 
5489
The opcodes library provides @value{GDBN}'s disassembler.  (It's a separate
5490
library because it's also used in binutils, for @file{objdump}).
5491
 
5492
@section readline
5493
@cindex readline library
5494
The @code{readline} library provides a set of functions for use by applications
5495
that allow users to edit command lines as they are typed in.
5496
 
5497
@section libiberty
5498
@cindex @code{libiberty} library
5499
 
5500
The @code{libiberty} library provides a set of functions and features
5501
that integrate and improve on functionality found in modern operating
5502
systems.  Broadly speaking, such features can be divided into three
5503
groups: supplemental functions (functions that may be missing in some
5504
environments and operating systems), replacement functions (providing
5505
a uniform and easier to use interface for commonly used standard
5506
functions), and extensions (which provide additional functionality
5507
beyond standard functions).
5508
 
5509
@value{GDBN} uses various features provided by the @code{libiberty}
5510
library, for instance the C@t{++} demangler, the @acronym{IEEE}
5511
floating format support functions, the input options parser
5512
@samp{getopt}, the @samp{obstack} extension, and other functions.
5513
 
5514
@subsection @code{obstacks} in @value{GDBN}
5515
@cindex @code{obstacks}
5516
 
5517
The obstack mechanism provides a convenient way to allocate and free
5518
chunks of memory.  Each obstack is a pool of memory that is managed
5519
like a stack.  Objects (of any nature, size and alignment) are
5520
allocated and freed in a @acronym{LIFO} fashion on an obstack (see
5521
@code{libiberty}'s documentation for a more detailed explanation of
5522
@code{obstacks}).
5523
 
5524
The most noticeable use of the @code{obstacks} in @value{GDBN} is in
5525
object files.  There is an obstack associated with each internal
5526
representation of an object file.  Lots of things get allocated on
5527
these @code{obstacks}: dictionary entries, blocks, blockvectors,
5528
symbols, minimal symbols, types, vectors of fundamental types, class
5529
fields of types, object files section lists, object files section
5530
offset lists, line tables, symbol tables, partial symbol tables,
5531
string tables, symbol table private data, macros tables, debug
5532
information sections and entries, import and export lists (som),
5533
unwind information (hppa), dwarf2 location expressions data.  Plus
5534
various strings such as directory names strings, debug format strings,
5535
names of types.
5536
 
5537
An essential and convenient property of all data on @code{obstacks} is
5538
that memory for it gets allocated (with @code{obstack_alloc}) at
5539
various times during a debugging session, but it is released all at
5540
once using the @code{obstack_free} function.  The @code{obstack_free}
5541
function takes a pointer to where in the stack it must start the
5542
deletion from (much like the cleanup chains have a pointer to where to
5543
start the cleanups).  Because of the stack like structure of the
5544
@code{obstacks}, this allows to free only a top portion of the
5545
obstack.  There are a few instances in @value{GDBN} where such thing
5546
happens.  Calls to @code{obstack_free} are done after some local data
5547
is allocated to the obstack.  Only the local data is deleted from the
5548
obstack.  Of course this assumes that nothing between the
5549
@code{obstack_alloc} and the @code{obstack_free} allocates anything
5550
else on the same obstack.  For this reason it is best and safest to
5551
use temporary @code{obstacks}.
5552
 
5553
Releasing the whole obstack is also not safe per se.  It is safe only
5554
under the condition that we know the @code{obstacks} memory is no
5555
longer needed.  In @value{GDBN} we get rid of the @code{obstacks} only
5556
when we get rid of the whole objfile(s), for instance upon reading a
5557
new symbol file.
5558
 
5559
@section gnu-regex
5560
@cindex regular expressions library
5561
 
5562
Regex conditionals.
5563
 
5564
@table @code
5565
@item C_ALLOCA
5566
 
5567
@item NFAILURES
5568
 
5569
@item RE_NREGS
5570
 
5571
@item SIGN_EXTEND_CHAR
5572
 
5573
@item SWITCH_ENUM_BUG
5574
 
5575
@item SYNTAX_TABLE
5576
 
5577
@item Sword
5578
 
5579
@item sparc
5580
@end table
5581
 
5582
@section Array Containers
5583
@cindex Array Containers
5584
@cindex VEC
5585
 
5586
Often it is necessary to manipulate a dynamic array of a set of
5587
objects.  C forces some bookkeeping on this, which can get cumbersome
5588
and repetitive.  The @file{vec.h} file contains macros for defining
5589
and using a typesafe vector type.  The functions defined will be
5590
inlined when compiling, and so the abstraction cost should be zero.
5591
Domain checks are added to detect programming errors.
5592
 
5593
An example use would be an array of symbols or section information.
5594
The array can be grown as symbols are read in (or preallocated), and
5595
the accessor macros provided keep care of all the necessary
5596
bookkeeping.  Because the arrays are type safe, there is no danger of
5597
accidentally mixing up the contents.  Think of these as C++ templates,
5598
but implemented in C.
5599
 
5600
Because of the different behavior of structure objects, scalar objects
5601
and of pointers, there are three flavors of vector, one for each of
5602
these variants.  Both the structure object and pointer variants pass
5603
pointers to objects around --- in the former case the pointers are
5604
stored into the vector and in the latter case the pointers are
5605
dereferenced and the objects copied into the vector.  The scalar
5606
object variant is suitable for @code{int}-like objects, and the vector
5607
elements are returned by value.
5608
 
5609
There are both @code{index} and @code{iterate} accessors.  The iterator
5610
returns a boolean iteration condition and updates the iteration
5611
variable passed by reference.  Because the iterator will be inlined,
5612
the address-of can be optimized away.
5613
 
5614
The vectors are implemented using the trailing array idiom, thus they
5615
are not resizeable without changing the address of the vector object
5616
itself.  This means you cannot have variables or fields of vector type
5617
--- always use a pointer to a vector.  The one exception is the final
5618
field of a structure, which could be a vector type.  You will have to
5619
use the @code{embedded_size} & @code{embedded_init} calls to create
5620
such objects, and they will probably not be resizeable (so don't use
5621
the @dfn{safe} allocation variants).  The trailing array idiom is used
5622
(rather than a pointer to an array of data), because, if we allow
5623
@code{NULL} to also represent an empty vector, empty vectors occupy
5624
minimal space in the structure containing them.
5625
 
5626
Each operation that increases the number of active elements is
5627
available in @dfn{quick} and @dfn{safe} variants.  The former presumes
5628
that there is sufficient allocated space for the operation to succeed
5629
(it dies if there is not).  The latter will reallocate the vector, if
5630
needed.  Reallocation causes an exponential increase in vector size.
5631
If you know you will be adding N elements, it would be more efficient
5632
to use the reserve operation before adding the elements with the
5633
@dfn{quick} operation.  This will ensure there are at least as many
5634
elements as you ask for, it will exponentially increase if there are
5635
too few spare slots.  If you want reserve a specific number of slots,
5636
but do not want the exponential increase (for instance, you know this
5637
is the last allocation), use a negative number for reservation.  You
5638
can also create a vector of a specific size from the get go.
5639
 
5640
You should prefer the push and pop operations, as they append and
5641
remove from the end of the vector.  If you need to remove several items
5642
in one go, use the truncate operation.  The insert and remove
5643
operations allow you to change elements in the middle of the vector.
5644
There are two remove operations, one which preserves the element
5645
ordering @code{ordered_remove}, and one which does not
5646
@code{unordered_remove}.  The latter function copies the end element
5647
into the removed slot, rather than invoke a memmove operation.  The
5648
@code{lower_bound} function will determine where to place an item in
5649
the array using insert that will maintain sorted order.
5650
 
5651
If you need to directly manipulate a vector, then the @code{address}
5652
accessor will return the address of the start of the vector.  Also the
5653
@code{space} predicate will tell you whether there is spare capacity in the
5654
vector.  You will not normally need to use these two functions.
5655
 
5656
Vector types are defined using a
5657
@code{DEF_VEC_@{O,P,I@}(@var{typename})} macro.  Variables of vector
5658
type are declared using a @code{VEC(@var{typename})} macro.  The
5659
characters @code{O}, @code{P} and @code{I} indicate whether
5660
@var{typename} is an object (@code{O}), pointer (@code{P}) or integral
5661
(@code{I}) type.  Be careful to pick the correct one, as you'll get an
5662
awkward and inefficient API if you use the wrong one.  There is a
5663
check, which results in a compile-time warning, for the @code{P} and
5664
@code{I} versions, but there is no check for the @code{O} versions, as
5665
that is not possible in plain C.
5666
 
5667
An example of their use would be,
5668
 
5669
@smallexample
5670
DEF_VEC_P(tree);   // non-managed tree vector.
5671
 
5672
struct my_struct @{
5673
  VEC(tree) *v;      // A (pointer to) a vector of tree pointers.
5674
@};
5675
 
5676
struct my_struct *s;
5677
 
5678
if (VEC_length(tree, s->v)) @{ we have some contents @}
5679
VEC_safe_push(tree, s->v, decl); // append some decl onto the end
5680
for (ix = 0; VEC_iterate(tree, s->v, ix, elt); ix++)
5681
  @{ do something with elt @}
5682
 
5683
@end smallexample
5684
 
5685
The @file{vec.h} file provides details on how to invoke the various
5686
accessors provided.  They are enumerated here:
5687
 
5688
@table @code
5689
@item VEC_length
5690
Return the number of items in the array,
5691
 
5692
@item VEC_empty
5693
Return true if the array has no elements.
5694
 
5695
@item VEC_last
5696
@itemx VEC_index
5697
Return the last or arbitrary item in the array.
5698
 
5699
@item VEC_iterate
5700
Access an array element and indicate whether the array has been
5701
traversed.
5702
 
5703
@item VEC_alloc
5704
@itemx VEC_free
5705
Create and destroy an array.
5706
 
5707
@item VEC_embedded_size
5708
@itemx VEC_embedded_init
5709
Helpers for embedding an array as the final element of another struct.
5710
 
5711
@item VEC_copy
5712
Duplicate an array.
5713
 
5714
@item VEC_space
5715
Return the amount of free space in an array.
5716
 
5717
@item VEC_reserve
5718
Ensure a certain amount of free space.
5719
 
5720
@item VEC_quick_push
5721
@itemx VEC_safe_push
5722
Append to an array, either assuming the space is available, or making
5723
sure that it is.
5724
 
5725
@item VEC_pop
5726
Remove the last item from an array.
5727
 
5728
@item VEC_truncate
5729
Remove several items from the end of an array.
5730
 
5731
@item VEC_safe_grow
5732
Add several items to the end of an array.
5733
 
5734
@item VEC_replace
5735
Overwrite an item in the array.
5736
 
5737
@item VEC_quick_insert
5738
@itemx VEC_safe_insert
5739
Insert an item into the middle of the array.  Either the space must
5740
already exist, or the space is created.
5741
 
5742
@item VEC_ordered_remove
5743
@itemx VEC_unordered_remove
5744
Remove an item from the array, preserving order or not.
5745
 
5746
@item VEC_block_remove
5747
Remove a set of items from the array.
5748
 
5749
@item VEC_address
5750
Provide the address of the first element.
5751
 
5752
@item VEC_lower_bound
5753
Binary search the array.
5754
 
5755
@end table
5756
 
5757
@section include
5758
 
5759
@node Coding
5760
 
5761
@chapter Coding
5762
 
5763
This chapter covers topics that are lower-level than the major
5764
algorithms of @value{GDBN}.
5765
 
5766
@section Cleanups
5767
@cindex cleanups
5768
 
5769
Cleanups are a structured way to deal with things that need to be done
5770
later.
5771
 
5772
When your code does something (e.g., @code{xmalloc} some memory, or
5773
@code{open} a file) that needs to be undone later (e.g., @code{xfree}
5774
the memory or @code{close} the file), it can make a cleanup.  The
5775
cleanup will be done at some future point: when the command is finished
5776
and control returns to the top level; when an error occurs and the stack
5777
is unwound; or when your code decides it's time to explicitly perform
5778
cleanups.  Alternatively you can elect to discard the cleanups you
5779
created.
5780
 
5781
Syntax:
5782
 
5783
@table @code
5784
@item struct cleanup *@var{old_chain};
5785
Declare a variable which will hold a cleanup chain handle.
5786
 
5787
@findex make_cleanup
5788
@item @var{old_chain} = make_cleanup (@var{function}, @var{arg});
5789
Make a cleanup which will cause @var{function} to be called with
5790
@var{arg} (a @code{char *}) later.  The result, @var{old_chain}, is a
5791
handle that can later be passed to @code{do_cleanups} or
5792
@code{discard_cleanups}.  Unless you are going to call
5793
@code{do_cleanups} or @code{discard_cleanups}, you can ignore the result
5794
from @code{make_cleanup}.
5795
 
5796
@findex do_cleanups
5797
@item do_cleanups (@var{old_chain});
5798
Do all cleanups added to the chain since the corresponding
5799
@code{make_cleanup} call was made.
5800
 
5801
@findex discard_cleanups
5802
@item discard_cleanups (@var{old_chain});
5803
Same as @code{do_cleanups} except that it just removes the cleanups from
5804
the chain and does not call the specified functions.
5805
@end table
5806
 
5807
Cleanups are implemented as a chain.  The handle returned by
5808
@code{make_cleanups} includes the cleanup passed to the call and any
5809
later cleanups appended to the chain (but not yet discarded or
5810
performed).  E.g.:
5811
 
5812
@smallexample
5813
make_cleanup (a, 0);
5814
@{
5815
  struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (b, 0);
5816
  make_cleanup (c, 0)
5817
  ...
5818
  do_cleanups (old);
5819
@}
5820
@end smallexample
5821
 
5822
@noindent
5823
will call @code{c()} and @code{b()} but will not call @code{a()}.  The
5824
cleanup that calls @code{a()} will remain in the cleanup chain, and will
5825
be done later unless otherwise discarded.@refill
5826
 
5827
Your function should explicitly do or discard the cleanups it creates.
5828
Failing to do this leads to non-deterministic behavior since the caller
5829
will arbitrarily do or discard your functions cleanups.  This need leads
5830
to two common cleanup styles.
5831
 
5832
The first style is try/finally.  Before it exits, your code-block calls
5833
@code{do_cleanups} with the old cleanup chain and thus ensures that your
5834
code-block's cleanups are always performed.  For instance, the following
5835
code-segment avoids a memory leak problem (even when @code{error} is
5836
called and a forced stack unwind occurs) by ensuring that the
5837
@code{xfree} will always be called:
5838
 
5839
@smallexample
5840
struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (null_cleanup, 0);
5841
data = xmalloc (sizeof blah);
5842
make_cleanup (xfree, data);
5843
... blah blah ...
5844
do_cleanups (old);
5845
@end smallexample
5846
 
5847
The second style is try/except.  Before it exits, your code-block calls
5848
@code{discard_cleanups} with the old cleanup chain and thus ensures that
5849
any created cleanups are not performed.  For instance, the following
5850
code segment, ensures that the file will be closed but only if there is
5851
an error:
5852
 
5853
@smallexample
5854
FILE *file = fopen ("afile", "r");
5855
struct cleanup *old = make_cleanup (close_file, file);
5856
... blah blah ...
5857
discard_cleanups (old);
5858
return file;
5859
@end smallexample
5860
 
5861
Some functions, e.g., @code{fputs_filtered()} or @code{error()}, specify
5862
that they ``should not be called when cleanups are not in place''.  This
5863
means that any actions you need to reverse in the case of an error or
5864
interruption must be on the cleanup chain before you call these
5865
functions, since they might never return to your code (they
5866
@samp{longjmp} instead).
5867
 
5868
@section Per-architecture module data
5869
@cindex per-architecture module data
5870
@cindex multi-arch data
5871
@cindex data-pointer, per-architecture/per-module
5872
 
5873
The multi-arch framework includes a mechanism for adding module
5874
specific per-architecture data-pointers to the @code{struct gdbarch}
5875
architecture object.
5876
 
5877
A module registers one or more per-architecture data-pointers using:
5878
 
5879
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} {struct gdbarch_data *} gdbarch_data_register_pre_init (gdbarch_data_pre_init_ftype *@var{pre_init})
5880
@var{pre_init} is used to, on-demand, allocate an initial value for a
5881
per-architecture data-pointer using the architecture's obstack (passed
5882
in as a parameter).  Since @var{pre_init} can be called during
5883
architecture creation, it is not parameterized with the architecture.
5884
and must not call modules that use per-architecture data.
5885
@end deftypefn
5886
 
5887
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} {struct gdbarch_data *} gdbarch_data_register_post_init (gdbarch_data_post_init_ftype *@var{post_init})
5888
@var{post_init} is used to obtain an initial value for a
5889
per-architecture data-pointer @emph{after}.  Since @var{post_init} is
5890
always called after architecture creation, it both receives the fully
5891
initialized architecture and is free to call modules that use
5892
per-architecture data (care needs to be taken to ensure that those
5893
other modules do not try to call back to this module as that will
5894
create in cycles in the initialization call graph).
5895
@end deftypefn
5896
 
5897
These functions return a @code{struct gdbarch_data} that is used to
5898
identify the per-architecture data-pointer added for that module.
5899
 
5900
The per-architecture data-pointer is accessed using the function:
5901
 
5902
@deftypefn {Architecture Function} {void *} gdbarch_data (struct gdbarch *@var{gdbarch}, struct gdbarch_data *@var{data_handle})
5903
Given the architecture @var{arch} and module data handle
5904
@var{data_handle} (returned by @code{gdbarch_data_register_pre_init}
5905
or @code{gdbarch_data_register_post_init}), this function returns the
5906
current value of the per-architecture data-pointer.  If the data
5907
pointer is @code{NULL}, it is first initialized by calling the
5908
corresponding @var{pre_init} or @var{post_init} method.
5909
@end deftypefn
5910
 
5911
The examples below assume the following definitions:
5912
 
5913
@smallexample
5914
struct nozel @{ int total; @};
5915
static struct gdbarch_data *nozel_handle;
5916
@end smallexample
5917
 
5918
A module can extend the architecture vector, adding additional
5919
per-architecture data, using the @var{pre_init} method.  The module's
5920
per-architecture data is then initialized during architecture
5921
creation.
5922
 
5923
In the below, the module's per-architecture @emph{nozel} is added.  An
5924
architecture can specify its nozel by calling @code{set_gdbarch_nozel}
5925
from @code{gdbarch_init}.
5926
 
5927
@smallexample
5928
static void *
5929
nozel_pre_init (struct obstack *obstack)
5930
@{
5931
  struct nozel *data = OBSTACK_ZALLOC (obstack, struct nozel);
5932
  return data;
5933
@}
5934
@end smallexample
5935
 
5936
@smallexample
5937
extern void
5938
set_gdbarch_nozel (struct gdbarch *gdbarch, int total)
5939
@{
5940
  struct nozel *data = gdbarch_data (gdbarch, nozel_handle);
5941
  data->total = nozel;
5942
@}
5943
@end smallexample
5944
 
5945
A module can on-demand create architecture dependent data structures
5946
using @code{post_init}.
5947
 
5948
In the below, the nozel's total is computed on-demand by
5949
@code{nozel_post_init} using information obtained from the
5950
architecture.
5951
 
5952
@smallexample
5953
static void *
5954
nozel_post_init (struct gdbarch *gdbarch)
5955
@{
5956
  struct nozel *data = GDBARCH_OBSTACK_ZALLOC (gdbarch, struct nozel);
5957
  nozel->total = gdbarch@dots{} (gdbarch);
5958
  return data;
5959
@}
5960
@end smallexample
5961
 
5962
@smallexample
5963
extern int
5964
nozel_total (struct gdbarch *gdbarch)
5965
@{
5966
  struct nozel *data = gdbarch_data (gdbarch, nozel_handle);
5967
  return data->total;
5968
@}
5969
@end smallexample
5970
 
5971
@section Wrapping Output Lines
5972
@cindex line wrap in output
5973
 
5974
@findex wrap_here
5975
Output that goes through @code{printf_filtered} or @code{fputs_filtered}
5976
or @code{fputs_demangled} needs only to have calls to @code{wrap_here}
5977
added in places that would be good breaking points.  The utility
5978
routines will take care of actually wrapping if the line width is
5979
exceeded.
5980
 
5981
The argument to @code{wrap_here} is an indentation string which is
5982
printed @emph{only} if the line breaks there.  This argument is saved
5983
away and used later.  It must remain valid until the next call to
5984
@code{wrap_here} or until a newline has been printed through the
5985
@code{*_filtered} functions.  Don't pass in a local variable and then
5986
return!
5987
 
5988
It is usually best to call @code{wrap_here} after printing a comma or
5989
space.  If you call it before printing a space, make sure that your
5990
indentation properly accounts for the leading space that will print if
5991
the line wraps there.
5992
 
5993
Any function or set of functions that produce filtered output must
5994
finish by printing a newline, to flush the wrap buffer, before switching
5995
to unfiltered (@code{printf}) output.  Symbol reading routines that
5996
print warnings are a good example.
5997
 
5998
@section @value{GDBN} Coding Standards
5999
@cindex coding standards
6000
 
6001
@value{GDBN} follows the GNU coding standards, as described in
6002
@file{etc/standards.texi}.  This file is also available for anonymous
6003
FTP from GNU archive sites.  @value{GDBN} takes a strict interpretation
6004
of the standard; in general, when the GNU standard recommends a practice
6005
but does not require it, @value{GDBN} requires it.
6006
 
6007
@value{GDBN} follows an additional set of coding standards specific to
6008
@value{GDBN}, as described in the following sections.
6009
 
6010
 
6011
@subsection ISO C
6012
 
6013
@value{GDBN} assumes an ISO/IEC 9899:1990 (a.k.a.@: ISO C90) compliant
6014
compiler.
6015
 
6016
@value{GDBN} does not assume an ISO C or POSIX compliant C library.
6017
 
6018
 
6019
@subsection Memory Management
6020
 
6021
@value{GDBN} does not use the functions @code{malloc}, @code{realloc},
6022
@code{calloc}, @code{free} and @code{asprintf}.
6023
 
6024
@value{GDBN} uses the functions @code{xmalloc}, @code{xrealloc} and
6025
@code{xcalloc} when allocating memory.  Unlike @code{malloc} et.al.@:
6026
these functions do not return when the memory pool is empty.  Instead,
6027
they unwind the stack using cleanups.  These functions return
6028
@code{NULL} when requested to allocate a chunk of memory of size zero.
6029
 
6030
@emph{Pragmatics: By using these functions, the need to check every
6031
memory allocation is removed.  These functions provide portable
6032
behavior.}
6033
 
6034
@value{GDBN} does not use the function @code{free}.
6035
 
6036
@value{GDBN} uses the function @code{xfree} to return memory to the
6037
memory pool.  Consistent with ISO-C, this function ignores a request to
6038
free a @code{NULL} pointer.
6039
 
6040
@emph{Pragmatics: On some systems @code{free} fails when passed a
6041
@code{NULL} pointer.}
6042
 
6043
@value{GDBN} can use the non-portable function @code{alloca} for the
6044
allocation of small temporary values (such as strings).
6045
 
6046
@emph{Pragmatics: This function is very non-portable.  Some systems
6047
restrict the memory being allocated to no more than a few kilobytes.}
6048
 
6049
@value{GDBN} uses the string function @code{xstrdup} and the print
6050
function @code{xstrprintf}.
6051
 
6052
@emph{Pragmatics: @code{asprintf} and @code{strdup} can fail.  Print
6053
functions such as @code{sprintf} are very prone to buffer overflow
6054
errors.}
6055
 
6056
 
6057
@subsection Compiler Warnings
6058
@cindex compiler warnings
6059
 
6060
With few exceptions, developers should avoid the configuration option
6061
@samp{--disable-werror} when building @value{GDBN}.  The exceptions
6062
are listed in the file @file{gdb/MAINTAINERS}.  The default, when
6063
building with @sc{gcc}, is @samp{--enable-werror}.
6064
 
6065
This option causes @value{GDBN} (when built using GCC) to be compiled
6066
with a carefully selected list of compiler warning flags.  Any warnings
6067
from those flags are treated as errors.
6068
 
6069
The current list of warning flags includes:
6070
 
6071
@table @samp
6072
@item -Wall
6073
Recommended @sc{gcc} warnings.
6074
 
6075
@item -Wdeclaration-after-statement
6076
 
6077
@sc{gcc} 3.x (and later) and @sc{c99} allow declarations mixed with
6078
code, but @sc{gcc} 2.x and @sc{c89} do not.
6079
 
6080
@item -Wpointer-arith
6081
 
6082
@item -Wformat-nonliteral
6083
Non-literal format strings, with a few exceptions, are bugs - they
6084
might contain unintended user-supplied format specifiers.
6085
Since @value{GDBN} uses the @code{format printf} attribute on all
6086
@code{printf} like functions this checks not just @code{printf} calls
6087
but also calls to functions such as @code{fprintf_unfiltered}.
6088
 
6089
@item -Wno-pointer-sign
6090
In version 4.0, GCC began warning about pointer argument passing or
6091
assignment even when the source and destination differed only in
6092
signedness.  However, most @value{GDBN} code doesn't distinguish
6093
carefully between @code{char} and @code{unsigned char}.  In early 2006
6094
the @value{GDBN} developers decided correcting these warnings wasn't
6095
worth the time it would take.
6096
 
6097
@item -Wno-unused-parameter
6098
Due to the way that @value{GDBN} is implemented many functions have
6099
unused parameters.  Consequently this warning is avoided.  The macro
6100
@code{ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED} is not used as it leads to false negatives ---
6101
it is not an error to have @code{ATTRIBUTE_UNUSED} on a parameter that
6102
is being used.
6103
 
6104
@item -Wno-unused
6105
@itemx -Wno-switch
6106
@itemx -Wno-char-subscripts
6107
These are warnings which might be useful for @value{GDBN}, but are
6108
currently too noisy to enable with @samp{-Werror}.
6109
 
6110
@end table
6111
 
6112
@subsection Formatting
6113
 
6114
@cindex source code formatting
6115
The standard GNU recommendations for formatting must be followed
6116
strictly.
6117
 
6118
A function declaration should not have its name in column zero.  A
6119
function definition should have its name in column zero.
6120
 
6121
@smallexample
6122
/* Declaration */
6123
static void foo (void);
6124
/* Definition */
6125
void
6126
foo (void)
6127
@{
6128
@}
6129
@end smallexample
6130
 
6131
@emph{Pragmatics: This simplifies scripting.  Function definitions can
6132
be found using @samp{^function-name}.}
6133
 
6134
There must be a space between a function or macro name and the opening
6135
parenthesis of its argument list (except for macro definitions, as
6136
required by C).  There must not be a space after an open paren/bracket
6137
or before a close paren/bracket.
6138
 
6139
While additional whitespace is generally helpful for reading, do not use
6140
more than one blank line to separate blocks, and avoid adding whitespace
6141
after the end of a program line (as of 1/99, some 600 lines had
6142
whitespace after the semicolon).  Excess whitespace causes difficulties
6143
for @code{diff} and @code{patch} utilities.
6144
 
6145
Pointers are declared using the traditional K&R C style:
6146
 
6147
@smallexample
6148
void *foo;
6149
@end smallexample
6150
 
6151
@noindent
6152
and not:
6153
 
6154
@smallexample
6155
void * foo;
6156
void* foo;
6157
@end smallexample
6158
 
6159
@subsection Comments
6160
 
6161
@cindex comment formatting
6162
The standard GNU requirements on comments must be followed strictly.
6163
 
6164
Block comments must appear in the following form, with no @code{/*}- or
6165
@code{*/}-only lines, and no leading @code{*}:
6166
 
6167
@smallexample
6168
/* Wait for control to return from inferior to debugger.  If inferior
6169
   gets a signal, we may decide to start it up again instead of
6170
   returning.  That is why there is a loop in this function.  When
6171
   this function actually returns it means the inferior should be left
6172
   stopped and @value{GDBN} should read more commands.  */
6173
@end smallexample
6174
 
6175
(Note that this format is encouraged by Emacs; tabbing for a multi-line
6176
comment works correctly, and @kbd{M-q} fills the block consistently.)
6177
 
6178
Put a blank line between the block comments preceding function or
6179
variable definitions, and the definition itself.
6180
 
6181
In general, put function-body comments on lines by themselves, rather
6182
than trying to fit them into the 20 characters left at the end of a
6183
line, since either the comment or the code will inevitably get longer
6184
than will fit, and then somebody will have to move it anyhow.
6185
 
6186
@subsection C Usage
6187
 
6188
@cindex C data types
6189
Code must not depend on the sizes of C data types, the format of the
6190
host's floating point numbers, the alignment of anything, or the order
6191
of evaluation of expressions.
6192
 
6193
@cindex function usage
6194
Use functions freely.  There are only a handful of compute-bound areas
6195
in @value{GDBN} that might be affected by the overhead of a function
6196
call, mainly in symbol reading.  Most of @value{GDBN}'s performance is
6197
limited by the target interface (whether serial line or system call).
6198
 
6199
However, use functions with moderation.  A thousand one-line functions
6200
are just as hard to understand as a single thousand-line function.
6201
 
6202
@emph{Macros are bad, M'kay.}
6203
(But if you have to use a macro, make sure that the macro arguments are
6204
protected with parentheses.)
6205
 
6206
@cindex types
6207
 
6208
Declarations like @samp{struct foo *} should be used in preference to
6209
declarations like @samp{typedef struct foo @{ @dots{} @} *foo_ptr}.
6210
 
6211
 
6212
@subsection Function Prototypes
6213
@cindex function prototypes
6214
 
6215
Prototypes must be used when both @emph{declaring} and @emph{defining}
6216
a function.  Prototypes for @value{GDBN} functions must include both the
6217
argument type and name, with the name matching that used in the actual
6218
function definition.
6219
 
6220
All external functions should have a declaration in a header file that
6221
callers include, except for @code{_initialize_*} functions, which must
6222
be external so that @file{init.c} construction works, but shouldn't be
6223
visible to random source files.
6224
 
6225
Where a source file needs a forward declaration of a static function,
6226
that declaration must appear in a block near the top of the source file.
6227
 
6228
 
6229
@subsection Internal Error Recovery
6230
 
6231
During its execution, @value{GDBN} can encounter two types of errors.
6232
User errors and internal errors.  User errors include not only a user
6233
entering an incorrect command but also problems arising from corrupt
6234
object files and system errors when interacting with the target.
6235
Internal errors include situations where @value{GDBN} has detected, at
6236
run time, a corrupt or erroneous situation.
6237
 
6238
When reporting an internal error, @value{GDBN} uses
6239
@code{internal_error} and @code{gdb_assert}.
6240
 
6241
@value{GDBN} must not call @code{abort} or @code{assert}.
6242
 
6243
@emph{Pragmatics: There is no @code{internal_warning} function.  Either
6244
the code detected a user error, recovered from it and issued a
6245
@code{warning} or the code failed to correctly recover from the user
6246
error and issued an @code{internal_error}.}
6247
 
6248
@subsection Command Names
6249
 
6250
GDB U/I commands are written @samp{foo-bar}, not @samp{foo_bar}.
6251
 
6252
@subsection File Names
6253
 
6254
Any file used when building the core of @value{GDBN} must be in lower
6255
case.  Any file used when building the core of @value{GDBN} must be 8.3
6256
unique.  These requirements apply to both source and generated files.
6257
 
6258
@emph{Pragmatics: The core of @value{GDBN} must be buildable on many
6259
platforms including DJGPP and MacOS/HFS.  Every time an unfriendly file
6260
is introduced to the build process both @file{Makefile.in} and
6261
@file{configure.in} need to be modified accordingly.  Compare the
6262
convoluted conversion process needed to transform @file{COPYING} into
6263
@file{copying.c} with the conversion needed to transform
6264
@file{version.in} into @file{version.c}.}
6265
 
6266
Any file non 8.3 compliant file (that is not used when building the core
6267
of @value{GDBN}) must be added to @file{gdb/config/djgpp/fnchange.lst}.
6268
 
6269
@emph{Pragmatics: This is clearly a compromise.}
6270
 
6271
When @value{GDBN} has a local version of a system header file (ex
6272
@file{string.h}) the file name based on the POSIX header prefixed with
6273
@file{gdb_} (@file{gdb_string.h}).  These headers should be relatively
6274
independent: they should use only macros defined by @file{configure},
6275
the compiler, or the host; they should include only system headers; they
6276
should refer only to system types.  They may be shared between multiple
6277
programs, e.g.@: @value{GDBN} and @sc{gdbserver}.
6278
 
6279
For other files @samp{-} is used as the separator.
6280
 
6281
 
6282
@subsection Include Files
6283
 
6284
A @file{.c} file should include @file{defs.h} first.
6285
 
6286
A @file{.c} file should directly include the @code{.h} file of every
6287
declaration and/or definition it directly refers to.  It cannot rely on
6288
indirect inclusion.
6289
 
6290
A @file{.h} file should directly include the @code{.h} file of every
6291
declaration and/or definition it directly refers to.  It cannot rely on
6292
indirect inclusion.  Exception: The file @file{defs.h} does not need to
6293
be directly included.
6294
 
6295
An external declaration should only appear in one include file.
6296
 
6297
An external declaration should never appear in a @code{.c} file.
6298
Exception: a declaration for the @code{_initialize} function that
6299
pacifies @option{-Wmissing-declaration}.
6300
 
6301
A @code{typedef} definition should only appear in one include file.
6302
 
6303
An opaque @code{struct} declaration can appear in multiple @file{.h}
6304
files.  Where possible, a @file{.h} file should use an opaque
6305
@code{struct} declaration instead of an include.
6306
 
6307
All @file{.h} files should be wrapped in:
6308
 
6309
@smallexample
6310
#ifndef INCLUDE_FILE_NAME_H
6311
#define INCLUDE_FILE_NAME_H
6312
header body
6313
#endif
6314
@end smallexample
6315
 
6316
 
6317
@subsection Clean Design and Portable Implementation
6318
 
6319
@cindex design
6320
In addition to getting the syntax right, there's the little question of
6321
semantics.  Some things are done in certain ways in @value{GDBN} because long
6322
experience has shown that the more obvious ways caused various kinds of
6323
trouble.
6324
 
6325
@cindex assumptions about targets
6326
You can't assume the byte order of anything that comes from a target
6327
(including @var{value}s, object files, and instructions).  Such things
6328
must be byte-swapped using @code{SWAP_TARGET_AND_HOST} in
6329
@value{GDBN}, or one of the swap routines defined in @file{bfd.h},
6330
such as @code{bfd_get_32}.
6331
 
6332
You can't assume that you know what interface is being used to talk to
6333
the target system.  All references to the target must go through the
6334
current @code{target_ops} vector.
6335
 
6336
You can't assume that the host and target machines are the same machine
6337
(except in the ``native'' support modules).  In particular, you can't
6338
assume that the target machine's header files will be available on the
6339
host machine.  Target code must bring along its own header files --
6340
written from scratch or explicitly donated by their owner, to avoid
6341
copyright problems.
6342
 
6343
@cindex portability
6344
Insertion of new @code{#ifdef}'s will be frowned upon.  It's much better
6345
to write the code portably than to conditionalize it for various
6346
systems.
6347
 
6348
@cindex system dependencies
6349
New @code{#ifdef}'s which test for specific compilers or manufacturers
6350
or operating systems are unacceptable.  All @code{#ifdef}'s should test
6351
for features.  The information about which configurations contain which
6352
features should be segregated into the configuration files.  Experience
6353
has proven far too often that a feature unique to one particular system
6354
often creeps into other systems; and that a conditional based on some
6355
predefined macro for your current system will become worthless over
6356
time, as new versions of your system come out that behave differently
6357
with regard to this feature.
6358
 
6359
Adding code that handles specific architectures, operating systems,
6360
target interfaces, or hosts, is not acceptable in generic code.
6361
 
6362
@cindex portable file name handling
6363
@cindex file names, portability
6364
One particularly notorious area where system dependencies tend to
6365
creep in is handling of file names.  The mainline @value{GDBN} code
6366
assumes Posix semantics of file names: absolute file names begin with
6367
a forward slash @file{/}, slashes are used to separate leading
6368
directories, case-sensitive file names.  These assumptions are not
6369
necessarily true on non-Posix systems such as MS-Windows.  To avoid
6370
system-dependent code where you need to take apart or construct a file
6371
name, use the following portable macros:
6372
 
6373
@table @code
6374
@findex HAVE_DOS_BASED_FILE_SYSTEM
6375
@item HAVE_DOS_BASED_FILE_SYSTEM
6376
This preprocessing symbol is defined to a non-zero value on hosts
6377
whose filesystems belong to the MS-DOS/MS-Windows family.  Use this
6378
symbol to write conditional code which should only be compiled for
6379
such hosts.
6380
 
6381
@findex IS_DIR_SEPARATOR
6382
@item IS_DIR_SEPARATOR (@var{c})
6383
Evaluates to a non-zero value if @var{c} is a directory separator
6384
character.  On Unix and GNU/Linux systems, only a slash @file{/} is
6385
such a character, but on Windows, both @file{/} and @file{\} will
6386
pass.
6387
 
6388
@findex IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH
6389
@item IS_ABSOLUTE_PATH (@var{file})
6390
Evaluates to a non-zero value if @var{file} is an absolute file name.
6391
For Unix and GNU/Linux hosts, a name which begins with a slash
6392
@file{/} is absolute.  On DOS and Windows, @file{d:/foo} and
6393
@file{x:\bar} are also absolute file names.
6394
 
6395
@findex FILENAME_CMP
6396
@item FILENAME_CMP (@var{f1}, @var{f2})
6397
Calls a function which compares file names @var{f1} and @var{f2} as
6398
appropriate for the underlying host filesystem.  For Posix systems,
6399
this simply calls @code{strcmp}; on case-insensitive filesystems it
6400
will call @code{strcasecmp} instead.
6401
 
6402
@findex DIRNAME_SEPARATOR
6403
@item DIRNAME_SEPARATOR
6404
Evaluates to a character which separates directories in
6405
@code{PATH}-style lists, typically held in environment variables.
6406
This character is @samp{:} on Unix, @samp{;} on DOS and Windows.
6407
 
6408
@findex SLASH_STRING
6409
@item SLASH_STRING
6410
This evaluates to a constant string you should use to produce an
6411
absolute filename from leading directories and the file's basename.
6412
@code{SLASH_STRING} is @code{"/"} on most systems, but might be
6413
@code{"\\"} for some Windows-based ports.
6414
@end table
6415
 
6416
In addition to using these macros, be sure to use portable library
6417
functions whenever possible.  For example, to extract a directory or a
6418
basename part from a file name, use the @code{dirname} and
6419
@code{basename} library functions (available in @code{libiberty} for
6420
platforms which don't provide them), instead of searching for a slash
6421
with @code{strrchr}.
6422
 
6423
Another way to generalize @value{GDBN} along a particular interface is with an
6424
attribute struct.  For example, @value{GDBN} has been generalized to handle
6425
multiple kinds of remote interfaces---not by @code{#ifdef}s everywhere, but
6426
by defining the @code{target_ops} structure and having a current target (as
6427
well as a stack of targets below it, for memory references).  Whenever
6428
something needs to be done that depends on which remote interface we are
6429
using, a flag in the current target_ops structure is tested (e.g.,
6430
@code{target_has_stack}), or a function is called through a pointer in the
6431
current target_ops structure.  In this way, when a new remote interface
6432
is added, only one module needs to be touched---the one that actually
6433
implements the new remote interface.  Other examples of
6434
attribute-structs are BFD access to multiple kinds of object file
6435
formats, or @value{GDBN}'s access to multiple source languages.
6436
 
6437
Please avoid duplicating code.  For example, in @value{GDBN} 3.x all
6438
the code interfacing between @code{ptrace} and the rest of
6439
@value{GDBN} was duplicated in @file{*-dep.c}, and so changing
6440
something was very painful.  In @value{GDBN} 4.x, these have all been
6441
consolidated into @file{infptrace.c}.  @file{infptrace.c} can deal
6442
with variations between systems the same way any system-independent
6443
file would (hooks, @code{#if defined}, etc.), and machines which are
6444
radically different don't need to use @file{infptrace.c} at all.
6445
 
6446
All debugging code must be controllable using the @samp{set debug
6447
@var{module}} command.  Do not use @code{printf} to print trace
6448
messages.  Use @code{fprintf_unfiltered(gdb_stdlog, ...}.  Do not use
6449
@code{#ifdef DEBUG}.
6450
 
6451
 
6452
@node Porting GDB
6453
 
6454
@chapter Porting @value{GDBN}
6455
@cindex porting to new machines
6456
 
6457
Most of the work in making @value{GDBN} compile on a new machine is in
6458
specifying the configuration of the machine.  Porting a new
6459
architecture to @value{GDBN} can be broken into a number of steps.
6460
 
6461
@itemize @bullet
6462
 
6463
@item
6464
Ensure a @sc{bfd} exists for executables of the target architecture in
6465
the @file{bfd} directory.  If one does not exist, create one by
6466
modifying an existing similar one.
6467
 
6468
@item
6469
Implement a disassembler for the target architecture in the @file{opcodes}
6470
directory.
6471
 
6472
@item
6473
Define the target architecture in the @file{gdb} directory
6474
(@pxref{Adding a New Target, , Adding a New Target}).  Add the pattern
6475
for the new target to @file{configure.tgt} with the names of the files
6476
that contain the code.  By convention the target architecture
6477
definition for an architecture @var{arch} is placed in
6478
@file{@var{arch}-tdep.c}.
6479
 
6480
Within @file{@var{arch}-tdep.c} define the function
6481
@code{_initialize_@var{arch}_tdep} which calls
6482
@code{gdbarch_register} to create the new @code{@w{struct
6483
gdbarch}} for the architecture.
6484
 
6485
@item
6486
If a new remote target is needed, consider adding a new remote target
6487
by defining a function
6488
@code{_initialize_remote_@var{arch}}.  However if at all possible
6489
use the @value{GDBN} @emph{Remote Serial Protocol} for this and implement
6490
the server side protocol independently with the target.
6491
 
6492
@item
6493
If desired implement a simulator in the @file{sim} directory.  This
6494
should create the library @file{libsim.a} implementing the interface
6495
in @file{remote-sim.h} (found in the @file{include} directory).
6496
 
6497
@item
6498
Build and test.  If desired, lobby the @sc{gdb} steering group to
6499
have the new port included in the main distribution!
6500
 
6501
@item
6502
Add a description of the new architecture to the main @value{GDBN} user
6503
guide (@pxref{Configuration Specific Information, , Configuration
6504
Specific Information, gdb, Debugging with @value{GDBN}}).
6505
 
6506
@end itemize
6507
 
6508
@node Versions and Branches
6509
@chapter Versions and Branches
6510
 
6511
@section Versions
6512
 
6513
@value{GDBN}'s version is determined by the file
6514
@file{gdb/version.in} and takes one of the following forms:
6515
 
6516
@table @asis
6517
@item @var{major}.@var{minor}
6518
@itemx @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}
6519
an official release (e.g., 6.2 or 6.2.1)
6520
@item @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
6521
a snapshot taken at @var{YYYY}-@var{MM}-@var{DD}-gmt (e.g.,
6522
6.1.50.20020302, 6.1.90.20020304, or 6.1.0.20020308)
6523
@item @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}-cvs
6524
a @sc{cvs} check out drawn on @var{YYYY}-@var{MM}-@var{DD} (e.g.,
6525
6.1.50.20020302-cvs, 6.1.90.20020304-cvs, or 6.1.0.20020308-cvs)
6526
@item @var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD} (@var{vendor})
6527
a vendor specific release of @value{GDBN}, that while based on@*
6528
@var{major}.@var{minor}.@var{patchlevel}.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD},
6529
may include additional changes
6530
@end table
6531
 
6532
@value{GDBN}'s mainline uses the @var{major} and @var{minor} version
6533
numbers from the most recent release branch, with a @var{patchlevel}
6534
of 50.  At the time each new release branch is created, the mainline's
6535
@var{major} and @var{minor} version numbers are updated.
6536
 
6537
@value{GDBN}'s release branch is similar.  When the branch is cut, the
6538
@var{patchlevel} is changed from 50 to 90.  As draft releases are
6539
drawn from the branch, the @var{patchlevel} is incremented.  Once the
6540
first release (@var{major}.@var{minor}) has been made, the
6541
@var{patchlevel} is set to 0 and updates have an incremented
6542
@var{patchlevel}.
6543
 
6544
For snapshots, and @sc{cvs} check outs, it is also possible to
6545
identify the @sc{cvs} origin:
6546
 
6547
@table @asis
6548
@item @var{major}.@var{minor}.50.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
6549
drawn from the @sc{head} of mainline @sc{cvs} (e.g., 6.1.50.20020302)
6550
@item @var{major}.@var{minor}.90.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
6551
@itemx @var{major}.@var{minor}.91.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD} @dots{}
6552
drawn from a release branch prior to the release (e.g.,
6553
6.1.90.20020304)
6554
@item @var{major}.@var{minor}.0.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}
6555
@itemx @var{major}.@var{minor}.1.@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD} @dots{}
6556
drawn from a release branch after the release (e.g., 6.2.0.20020308)
6557
@end table
6558
 
6559
If the previous @value{GDBN} version is 6.1 and the current version is
6560
6.2, then, substituting 6 for @var{major} and 1 or 2 for @var{minor},
6561
here's an illustration of a typical sequence:
6562
 
6563
@smallexample
6564
     <HEAD>
6565
        |
6566
6.1.50.20020302-cvs
6567
        |
6568
        +--------------------------.
6569
        |                    <gdb_6_2-branch>
6570
        |                          |
6571
6.2.50.20020303-cvs        6.1.90 (draft #1)
6572
        |                          |
6573
6.2.50.20020304-cvs        6.1.90.20020304-cvs
6574
        |                          |
6575
6.2.50.20020305-cvs        6.1.91 (draft #2)
6576
        |                          |
6577
6.2.50.20020306-cvs        6.1.91.20020306-cvs
6578
        |                          |
6579
6.2.50.20020307-cvs        6.2 (release)
6580
        |                          |
6581
6.2.50.20020308-cvs        6.2.0.20020308-cvs
6582
        |                          |
6583
6.2.50.20020309-cvs        6.2.1 (update)
6584
        |                          |
6585
6.2.50.20020310-cvs         <branch closed>
6586
        |
6587
6.2.50.20020311-cvs
6588
        |
6589
        +--------------------------.
6590
        |                     <gdb_6_3-branch>
6591
        |                          |
6592
6.3.50.20020312-cvs        6.2.90 (draft #1)
6593
        |                          |
6594
@end smallexample
6595
 
6596
@section Release Branches
6597
@cindex Release Branches
6598
 
6599
@value{GDBN} draws a release series (6.2, 6.2.1, @dots{}) from a
6600
single release branch, and identifies that branch using the @sc{cvs}
6601
branch tags:
6602
 
6603
@smallexample
6604
gdb_@var{major}_@var{minor}-@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}-branchpoint
6605
gdb_@var{major}_@var{minor}-branch
6606
gdb_@var{major}_@var{minor}-@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}-release
6607
@end smallexample
6608
 
6609
@emph{Pragmatics: To help identify the date at which a branch or
6610
release is made, both the branchpoint and release tags include the
6611
date that they are cut (@var{YYYY}@var{MM}@var{DD}) in the tag.  The
6612
branch tag, denoting the head of the branch, does not need this.}
6613
 
6614
@section Vendor Branches
6615
@cindex vendor branches
6616
 
6617
To avoid version conflicts, vendors are expected to modify the file
6618
@file{gdb/version.in} to include a vendor unique alphabetic identifier
6619
(an official @value{GDBN} release never uses alphabetic characters in
6620
its version identifier).  E.g., @samp{6.2widgit2}, or @samp{6.2 (Widgit
6621
Inc Patch 2)}.
6622
 
6623
@section Experimental Branches
6624
@cindex experimental branches
6625
 
6626
@subsection Guidelines
6627
 
6628
@value{GDBN} permits the creation of branches, cut from the @sc{cvs}
6629
repository, for experimental development.  Branches make it possible
6630
for developers to share preliminary work, and maintainers to examine
6631
significant new developments.
6632
 
6633
The following are a set of guidelines for creating such branches:
6634
 
6635
@table @emph
6636
 
6637
@item a branch has an owner
6638
The owner can set further policy for a branch, but may not change the
6639
ground rules.  In particular, they can set a policy for commits (be it
6640
adding more reviewers or deciding who can commit).
6641
 
6642
@item all commits are posted
6643
All changes committed to a branch shall also be posted to
6644
@email{gdb-patches@@sourceware.org, the @value{GDBN} patches
6645
mailing list}.  While commentary on such changes are encouraged, people
6646
should remember that the changes only apply to a branch.
6647
 
6648
@item all commits are covered by an assignment
6649
This ensures that all changes belong to the Free Software Foundation,
6650
and avoids the possibility that the branch may become contaminated.
6651
 
6652
@item a branch is focused
6653
A focused branch has a single objective or goal, and does not contain
6654
unnecessary or irrelevant changes.  Cleanups, where identified, being
6655
be pushed into the mainline as soon as possible.
6656
 
6657
@item a branch tracks mainline
6658
This keeps the level of divergence under control.  It also keeps the
6659
pressure on developers to push cleanups and other stuff into the
6660
mainline.
6661
 
6662
@item a branch shall contain the entire @value{GDBN} module
6663
The @value{GDBN} module @code{gdb} should be specified when creating a
6664
branch (branches of individual files should be avoided).  @xref{Tags}.
6665
 
6666
@item a branch shall be branded using @file{version.in}
6667
The file @file{gdb/version.in} shall be modified so that it identifies
6668
the branch @var{owner} and branch @var{name}, e.g.,
6669
@samp{6.2.50.20030303_owner_name} or @samp{6.2 (Owner Name)}.
6670
 
6671
@end table
6672
 
6673
@subsection Tags
6674
@anchor{Tags}
6675
 
6676
To simplify the identification of @value{GDBN} branches, the following
6677
branch tagging convention is strongly recommended:
6678
 
6679
@table @code
6680
 
6681
@item @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint
6682
@itemx @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branch
6683
The branch point and corresponding branch tag.  @var{YYYYMMDD} is the
6684
date that the branch was created.  A branch is created using the
6685
sequence: @anchor{experimental branch tags}
6686
@smallexample
6687
cvs rtag @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint gdb
6688
cvs rtag -b -r @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint \
6689
   @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branch gdb
6690
@end smallexample
6691
 
6692
@item @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{yyyymmdd}-mergepoint
6693
The tagged point, on the mainline, that was used when merging the branch
6694
on @var{yyyymmdd}.  To merge in all changes since the branch was cut,
6695
use a command sequence like:
6696
@smallexample
6697
cvs rtag @var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{yyyymmdd}-mergepoint gdb
6698
cvs update \
6699
   -j@var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{YYYYMMDD}-branchpoint
6700
   -j@var{owner}_@var{name}-@var{yyyymmdd}-mergepoint
6701
@end smallexample
6702
@noindent
6703
Similar sequences can be used to just merge in changes since the last
6704
merge.
6705
 
6706
@end table
6707
 
6708
@noindent
6709
For further information on @sc{cvs}, see
6710
@uref{http://www.gnu.org/software/cvs/, Concurrent Versions System}.
6711
 
6712
@node Start of New Year Procedure
6713
@chapter Start of New Year Procedure
6714
@cindex new year procedure
6715
 
6716
At the start of each new year, the following actions should be performed:
6717
 
6718
@itemize @bullet
6719
@item
6720
Rotate the ChangeLog file
6721
 
6722
The current @file{ChangeLog} file should be renamed into
6723
@file{ChangeLog-YYYY} where YYYY is the year that has just passed.
6724
A new @file{ChangeLog} file should be created, and its contents should
6725
contain a reference to the previous ChangeLog.  The following should
6726
also be preserved at the end of the new ChangeLog, in order to provide
6727
the appropriate settings when editing this file with Emacs:
6728
@smallexample
6729
Local Variables:
6730
mode: change-log
6731
left-margin: 8
6732
fill-column: 74
6733
version-control: never
6734
coding: utf-8
6735
End:
6736
@end smallexample
6737
 
6738
@item
6739
Add an entry for the newly created ChangeLog file (@file{ChangeLog-YYYY})
6740
in @file{gdb/config/djgpp/fnchange.lst}.
6741
 
6742
@item
6743
Update the copyright year in the startup message
6744
 
6745
Update the copyright year in:
6746
@itemize @bullet
6747
  @item
6748
  file @file{top.c}, function @code{print_gdb_version}
6749
  @item
6750
  file @file{gdbserver/server.c}, function @code{gdbserver_version}
6751
  @item
6752
  file @file{gdbserver/gdbreplay.c}, function @code{gdbreplay_version}
6753
@end itemize
6754
 
6755
@item
6756
Run the @file{copyright.sh} script to add the new year in the copyright
6757
notices of most source files.  This script requires Emacs 22 or later to
6758
be installed.
6759
 
6760
@item
6761
The new year also needs to be added manually in all other files that
6762
are not already taken care of by the @file{copyright.sh} script:
6763
@itemize @bullet
6764
  @item
6765
  @file{*.s}
6766
  @item
6767
  @file{*.f}
6768
  @item
6769
  @file{*.f90}
6770
  @item
6771
  @file{*.igen}
6772
  @item
6773
  @file{*.ac}
6774
  @item
6775
  @file{*.texi}
6776
  @item
6777
  @file{*.texinfo}
6778
  @item
6779
  @file{*.tex}
6780
  @item
6781
  @file{*.defs}
6782
  @item
6783
  @file{*.1}
6784
@end itemize
6785
 
6786
@end itemize
6787
 
6788
@node Releasing GDB
6789
 
6790
@chapter Releasing @value{GDBN}
6791
@cindex making a new release of gdb
6792
 
6793
@section Branch Commit Policy
6794
 
6795
The branch commit policy is pretty slack.  @value{GDBN} releases 5.0,
6796
5.1 and 5.2 all used the below:
6797
 
6798
@itemize @bullet
6799
@item
6800
The @file{gdb/MAINTAINERS} file still holds.
6801
@item
6802
Don't fix something on the branch unless/until it is also fixed in the
6803
trunk.  If this isn't possible, mentioning it in the @file{gdb/PROBLEMS}
6804
file is better than committing a hack.
6805
@item
6806
When considering a patch for the branch, suggested criteria include:
6807
Does it fix a build?  Does it fix the sequence @kbd{break main; run}
6808
when debugging a static binary?
6809
@item
6810
The further a change is from the core of @value{GDBN}, the less likely
6811
the change will worry anyone (e.g., target specific code).
6812
@item
6813
Only post a proposal to change the core of @value{GDBN} after you've
6814
sent individual bribes to all the people listed in the
6815
@file{MAINTAINERS} file @t{;-)}
6816
@end itemize
6817
 
6818
@emph{Pragmatics: Provided updates are restricted to non-core
6819
functionality there is little chance that a broken change will be fatal.
6820
This means that changes such as adding a new architectures or (within
6821
reason) support for a new host are considered acceptable.}
6822
 
6823
 
6824
@section Obsoleting code
6825
 
6826
Before anything else, poke the other developers (and around the source
6827
code) to see if there is anything that can be removed from @value{GDBN}
6828
(an old target, an unused file).
6829
 
6830
Obsolete code is identified by adding an @code{OBSOLETE} prefix to every
6831
line.  Doing this means that it is easy to identify something that has
6832
been obsoleted when greping through the sources.
6833
 
6834
The process is done in stages --- this is mainly to ensure that the
6835
wider @value{GDBN} community has a reasonable opportunity to respond.
6836
Remember, everything on the Internet takes a week.
6837
 
6838
@enumerate
6839
@item
6840
Post the proposal on @email{gdb@@sourceware.org, the GDB mailing
6841
list} Creating a bug report to track the task's state, is also highly
6842
recommended.
6843
@item
6844
Wait a week or so.
6845
@item
6846
Post the proposal on @email{gdb-announce@@sourceware.org, the GDB
6847
Announcement mailing list}.
6848
@item
6849
Wait a week or so.
6850
@item
6851
Go through and edit all relevant files and lines so that they are
6852
prefixed with the word @code{OBSOLETE}.
6853
@item
6854
Wait until the next GDB version, containing this obsolete code, has been
6855
released.
6856
@item
6857
Remove the obsolete code.
6858
@end enumerate
6859
 
6860
@noindent
6861
@emph{Maintainer note: While removing old code is regrettable it is
6862
hopefully better for @value{GDBN}'s long term development.  Firstly it
6863
helps the developers by removing code that is either no longer relevant
6864
or simply wrong.  Secondly since it removes any history associated with
6865
the file (effectively clearing the slate) the developer has a much freer
6866
hand when it comes to fixing broken files.}
6867
 
6868
 
6869
 
6870
@section Before the Branch
6871
 
6872
The most important objective at this stage is to find and fix simple
6873
changes that become a pain to track once the branch is created.  For
6874
instance, configuration problems that stop @value{GDBN} from even
6875
building.  If you can't get the problem fixed, document it in the
6876
@file{gdb/PROBLEMS} file.
6877
 
6878
@subheading Prompt for @file{gdb/NEWS}
6879
 
6880
People always forget.  Send a post reminding them but also if you know
6881
something interesting happened add it yourself.  The @code{schedule}
6882
script will mention this in its e-mail.
6883
 
6884
@subheading Review @file{gdb/README}
6885
 
6886
Grab one of the nightly snapshots and then walk through the
6887
@file{gdb/README} looking for anything that can be improved.  The
6888
@code{schedule} script will mention this in its e-mail.
6889
 
6890
@subheading Refresh any imported files.
6891
 
6892
A number of files are taken from external repositories.  They include:
6893
 
6894
@itemize @bullet
6895
@item
6896
@file{texinfo/texinfo.tex}
6897
@item
6898
@file{config.guess} et.@: al.@: (see the top-level @file{MAINTAINERS}
6899
file)
6900
@item
6901
@file{etc/standards.texi}, @file{etc/make-stds.texi}
6902
@end itemize
6903
 
6904
@subheading Check the ARI
6905
 
6906
@uref{http://sourceware.org/gdb/ari,,A.R.I.} is an @code{awk} script
6907
(Awk Regression Index ;-) that checks for a number of errors and coding
6908
conventions.  The checks include things like using @code{malloc} instead
6909
of @code{xmalloc} and file naming problems.  There shouldn't be any
6910
regressions.
6911
 
6912
@subsection Review the bug data base
6913
 
6914
Close anything obviously fixed.
6915
 
6916
@subsection Check all cross targets build
6917
 
6918
The targets are listed in @file{gdb/MAINTAINERS}.
6919
 
6920
 
6921
@section Cut the Branch
6922
 
6923
@subheading Create the branch
6924
 
6925
@smallexample
6926
$  u=5.1
6927
$  v=5.2
6928
$  V=`echo $v | sed 's/\./_/g'`
6929
$  D=`date -u +%Y-%m-%d`
6930
$  echo $u $V $D
6931
5.1 5_2 2002-03-03
6932
$  echo cvs -f -d :ext:sourceware.org:/cvs/src rtag \
6933
-D $D-gmt gdb_$V-$D-branchpoint insight
6934
cvs -f -d :ext:sourceware.org:/cvs/src rtag
6935
-D 2002-03-03-gmt gdb_5_2-2002-03-03-branchpoint insight
6936
$  ^echo ^^
6937
...
6938
$  echo cvs -f -d :ext:sourceware.org:/cvs/src rtag \
6939
-b -r gdb_$V-$D-branchpoint gdb_$V-branch insight
6940
cvs -f -d :ext:sourceware.org:/cvs/src rtag \
6941
-b -r gdb_5_2-2002-03-03-branchpoint gdb_5_2-branch insight
6942
$  ^echo ^^
6943
...
6944
$
6945
@end smallexample
6946
 
6947
@itemize @bullet
6948
@item
6949
By using @kbd{-D YYYY-MM-DD-gmt}, the branch is forced to an exact
6950
date/time.
6951
@item
6952
The trunk is first tagged so that the branch point can easily be found.
6953
@item
6954
Insight, which includes @value{GDBN}, is tagged at the same time.
6955
@item
6956
@file{version.in} gets bumped to avoid version number conflicts.
6957
@item
6958
The reading of @file{.cvsrc} is disabled using @file{-f}.
6959
@end itemize
6960
 
6961
@subheading Update @file{version.in}
6962
 
6963
@smallexample
6964
$  u=5.1
6965
$  v=5.2
6966
$  V=`echo $v | sed 's/\./_/g'`
6967
$  echo $u $v$V
6968
5.1 5_2
6969
$  cd /tmp
6970
$  echo cvs -f -d :ext:sourceware.org:/cvs/src co \
6971
-r gdb_$V-branch src/gdb/version.in
6972
cvs -f -d :ext:sourceware.org:/cvs/src co
6973
 -r gdb_5_2-branch src/gdb/version.in
6974
$  ^echo ^^
6975
U src/gdb/version.in
6976
$  cd src/gdb
6977
$  echo $u.90-0000-00-00-cvs > version.in
6978
$  cat version.in
6979
5.1.90-0000-00-00-cvs
6980
$  cvs -f commit version.in
6981
@end smallexample
6982
 
6983
@itemize @bullet
6984
@item
6985
@file{0000-00-00} is used as a date to pump prime the version.in update
6986
mechanism.
6987
@item
6988
@file{.90} and the previous branch version are used as fairly arbitrary
6989
initial branch version number.
6990
@end itemize
6991
 
6992
 
6993
@subheading Update the web and news pages
6994
 
6995
Something?
6996
 
6997
@subheading Tweak cron to track the new branch
6998
 
6999
The file @file{gdbadmin/cron/crontab} contains gdbadmin's cron table.
7000
This file needs to be updated so that:
7001
 
7002
@itemize @bullet
7003
@item
7004
A daily timestamp is added to the file @file{version.in}.
7005
@item
7006
The new branch is included in the snapshot process.
7007
@end itemize
7008
 
7009
@noindent
7010
See the file @file{gdbadmin/cron/README} for how to install the updated
7011
cron table.
7012
 
7013
The file @file{gdbadmin/ss/README} should also be reviewed to reflect
7014
any changes.  That file is copied to both the branch/ and current/
7015
snapshot directories.
7016
 
7017
 
7018
@subheading Update the NEWS and README files
7019
 
7020
The @file{NEWS} file needs to be updated so that on the branch it refers
7021
to @emph{changes in the current release} while on the trunk it also
7022
refers to @emph{changes since the current release}.
7023
 
7024
The @file{README} file needs to be updated so that it refers to the
7025
current release.
7026
 
7027
@subheading Post the branch info
7028
 
7029
Send an announcement to the mailing lists:
7030
 
7031
@itemize @bullet
7032
@item
7033
@email{gdb-announce@@sourceware.org, GDB Announcement mailing list}
7034
@item
7035
@email{gdb@@sourceware.org, GDB Discussion mailing list} and
7036
@email{gdb-testers@@sourceware.org, GDB Testers mailing list}
7037
@end itemize
7038
 
7039
@emph{Pragmatics: The branch creation is sent to the announce list to
7040
ensure that people people not subscribed to the higher volume discussion
7041
list are alerted.}
7042
 
7043
The announcement should include:
7044
 
7045
@itemize @bullet
7046
@item
7047
The branch tag.
7048
@item
7049
How to check out the branch using CVS.
7050
@item
7051
The date/number of weeks until the release.
7052
@item
7053
The branch commit policy still holds.
7054
@end itemize
7055
 
7056
@section Stabilize the branch
7057
 
7058
Something goes here.
7059
 
7060
@section Create a Release
7061
 
7062
The process of creating and then making available a release is broken
7063
down into a number of stages.  The first part addresses the technical
7064
process of creating a releasable tar ball.  The later stages address the
7065
process of releasing that tar ball.
7066
 
7067
When making a release candidate just the first section is needed.
7068
 
7069
@subsection Create a release candidate
7070
 
7071
The objective at this stage is to create a set of tar balls that can be
7072
made available as a formal release (or as a less formal release
7073
candidate).
7074
 
7075
@subsubheading Freeze the branch
7076
 
7077
Send out an e-mail notifying everyone that the branch is frozen to
7078
@email{gdb-patches@@sourceware.org}.
7079
 
7080
@subsubheading Establish a few defaults.
7081
 
7082
@smallexample
7083
$  b=gdb_5_2-branch
7084
$  v=5.2
7085
$  t=/sourceware/snapshot-tmp/gdbadmin-tmp
7086
$  echo $t/$b/$v
7087
/sourceware/snapshot-tmp/gdbadmin-tmp/gdb_5_2-branch/5.2
7088
$  mkdir -p $t/$b/$v
7089
$  cd $t/$b/$v
7090
$  pwd
7091
/sourceware/snapshot-tmp/gdbadmin-tmp/gdb_5_2-branch/5.2
7092
$  which autoconf
7093
/home/gdbadmin/bin/autoconf
7094
$
7095
@end smallexample
7096
 
7097
@noindent
7098
Notes:
7099
 
7100
@itemize @bullet
7101
@item
7102
Check the @code{autoconf} version carefully.  You want to be using the
7103
version documented in the toplevel @file{README-maintainer-mode} file.
7104
It is very unlikely that the version of @code{autoconf} installed in
7105
system directories (e.g., @file{/usr/bin/autoconf}) is correct.
7106
@end itemize
7107
 
7108
@subsubheading Check out the relevant modules:
7109
 
7110
@smallexample
7111
$  for m in gdb insight
7112
do
7113
( mkdir -p $m && cd $m && cvs -q -f -d /cvs/src co -P -r $b $m )
7114
done
7115
$
7116
@end smallexample
7117
 
7118
@noindent
7119
Note:
7120
 
7121
@itemize @bullet
7122
@item
7123
The reading of @file{.cvsrc} is disabled (@file{-f}) so that there isn't
7124
any confusion between what is written here and what your local
7125
@code{cvs} really does.
7126
@end itemize
7127
 
7128
@subsubheading Update relevant files.
7129
 
7130
@table @file
7131
 
7132
@item gdb/NEWS
7133
 
7134
Major releases get their comments added as part of the mainline.  Minor
7135
releases should probably mention any significant bugs that were fixed.
7136
 
7137
Don't forget to include the @file{ChangeLog} entry.
7138
 
7139
@smallexample
7140
$  emacs gdb/src/gdb/NEWS
7141
...
7142
c-x 4 a
7143
...
7144
c-x c-s c-x c-c
7145
$  cp gdb/src/gdb/NEWS insight/src/gdb/NEWS
7146
$  cp gdb/src/gdb/ChangeLog insight/src/gdb/ChangeLog
7147
@end smallexample
7148
 
7149
@item gdb/README
7150
 
7151
You'll need to update:
7152
 
7153
@itemize @bullet
7154
@item
7155
The version.
7156
@item
7157
The update date.
7158
@item
7159
Who did it.
7160
@end itemize
7161
 
7162
@smallexample
7163
$  emacs gdb/src/gdb/README
7164
...
7165
c-x 4 a
7166
...
7167
c-x c-s c-x c-c
7168
$  cp gdb/src/gdb/README insight/src/gdb/README
7169
$  cp gdb/src/gdb/ChangeLog insight/src/gdb/ChangeLog
7170
@end smallexample
7171
 
7172
@emph{Maintainer note: Hopefully the @file{README} file was reviewed
7173
before the initial branch was cut so just a simple substitute is needed
7174
to get it updated.}
7175
 
7176
@emph{Maintainer note: Other projects generate @file{README} and
7177
@file{INSTALL} from the core documentation.  This might be worth
7178
pursuing.}
7179
 
7180
@item gdb/version.in
7181
 
7182
@smallexample
7183
$  echo $v > gdb/src/gdb/version.in
7184
$  cat gdb/src/gdb/version.in
7185
5.2
7186
$  emacs gdb/src/gdb/version.in
7187
...
7188
c-x 4 a
7189
... Bump to version ...
7190
c-x c-s c-x c-c
7191
$  cp gdb/src/gdb/version.in insight/src/gdb/version.in
7192
$  cp gdb/src/gdb/ChangeLog insight/src/gdb/ChangeLog
7193
@end smallexample
7194
 
7195
@end table
7196
 
7197
@subsubheading Do the dirty work
7198
 
7199
This is identical to the process used to create the daily snapshot.
7200
 
7201
@smallexample
7202
$  for m in gdb insight
7203
do
7204
( cd $m/src && gmake -f src-release $m.tar )
7205
done
7206
@end smallexample
7207
 
7208
If the top level source directory does not have @file{src-release}
7209
(@value{GDBN} version 5.3.1 or earlier), try these commands instead:
7210
 
7211
@smallexample
7212
$  for m in gdb insight
7213
do
7214
( cd $m/src && gmake -f Makefile.in $m.tar )
7215
done
7216
@end smallexample
7217
 
7218
@subsubheading Check the source files
7219
 
7220
You're looking for files that have mysteriously disappeared.
7221
@kbd{distclean} has the habit of deleting files it shouldn't.  Watch out
7222
for the @file{version.in} update @kbd{cronjob}.
7223
 
7224
@smallexample
7225
$  ( cd gdb/src && cvs -f -q -n update )
7226
M djunpack.bat
7227
? gdb-5.1.91.tar
7228
? proto-toplev
7229
@dots{} lots of generated files @dots{}
7230
M gdb/ChangeLog
7231
M gdb/NEWS
7232
M gdb/README
7233
M gdb/version.in
7234
@dots{} lots of generated files @dots{}
7235
$
7236
@end smallexample
7237
 
7238
@noindent
7239
@emph{Don't worry about the @file{gdb.info-??} or
7240
@file{gdb/p-exp.tab.c}.  They were generated (and yes @file{gdb.info-1}
7241
was also generated only something strange with CVS means that they
7242
didn't get suppressed).  Fixing it would be nice though.}
7243
 
7244
@subsubheading Create compressed versions of the release
7245
 
7246
@smallexample
7247
$  cp */src/*.tar .
7248
$  cp */src/*.bz2 .
7249
$  ls -F
7250
gdb/ gdb-5.2.tar insight/ insight-5.2.tar
7251
$  for m in gdb insight
7252
do
7253
bzip2 -v -9 -c $m-$v.tar > $m-$v.tar.bz2
7254
gzip -v -9 -c $m-$v.tar > $m-$v.tar.gz
7255
done
7256
$
7257
@end smallexample
7258
 
7259
@noindent
7260
Note:
7261
 
7262
@itemize @bullet
7263
@item
7264
A pipe such as @kbd{bunzip2 < xxx.bz2 | gzip -9 > xxx.gz} is not since,
7265
in that mode, @code{gzip} does not know the name of the file and, hence,
7266
can not include it in the compressed file.  This is also why the release
7267
process runs @code{tar} and @code{bzip2} as separate passes.
7268
@end itemize
7269
 
7270
@subsection Sanity check the tar ball
7271
 
7272
Pick a popular machine (Solaris/PPC?) and try the build on that.
7273
 
7274
@smallexample
7275
$  bunzip2 < gdb-5.2.tar.bz2 | tar xpf -
7276
$  cd gdb-5.2
7277
$  ./configure
7278
$  make
7279
@dots{}
7280
$  ./gdb/gdb ./gdb/gdb
7281
GNU gdb 5.2
7282
@dots{}
7283
(gdb)  b main
7284
Breakpoint 1 at 0x80732bc: file main.c, line 734.
7285
(gdb)  run
7286
Starting program: /tmp/gdb-5.2/gdb/gdb
7287
 
7288
Breakpoint 1, main (argc=1, argv=0xbffff8b4) at main.c:734
7289
734       catch_errors (captured_main, &args, "", RETURN_MASK_ALL);
7290
(gdb)  print args
7291
$1 = @{argc = 136426532, argv = 0x821b7f0@}
7292
(gdb)
7293
@end smallexample
7294
 
7295
@subsection Make a release candidate available
7296
 
7297
If this is a release candidate then the only remaining steps are:
7298
 
7299
@enumerate
7300
@item
7301
Commit @file{version.in} and @file{ChangeLog}
7302
@item
7303
Tweak @file{version.in} (and @file{ChangeLog} to read
7304
@var{L}.@var{M}.@var{N}-0000-00-00-cvs so that the version update
7305
process can restart.
7306
@item
7307
Make the release candidate available in
7308
@uref{ftp://sourceware.org/pub/gdb/snapshots/branch}
7309
@item
7310
Notify the relevant mailing lists ( @email{gdb@@sourceware.org} and
7311
@email{gdb-testers@@sourceware.org} that the candidate is available.
7312
@end enumerate
7313
 
7314
@subsection Make a formal release available
7315
 
7316
(And you thought all that was required was to post an e-mail.)
7317
 
7318
@subsubheading Install on sware
7319
 
7320
Copy the new files to both the release and the old release directory:
7321
 
7322
@smallexample
7323
$  cp *.bz2 *.gz ~ftp/pub/gdb/old-releases/
7324
$  cp *.bz2 *.gz ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases
7325
@end smallexample
7326
 
7327
@noindent
7328
Clean up the releases directory so that only the most recent releases
7329
are available (e.g.@: keep 5.2 and 5.2.1 but remove 5.1):
7330
 
7331
@smallexample
7332
$  cd ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases
7333
$  rm @dots{}
7334
@end smallexample
7335
 
7336
@noindent
7337
Update the file @file{README} and @file{.message} in the releases
7338
directory:
7339
 
7340
@smallexample
7341
$  vi README
7342
@dots{}
7343
$  rm -f .message
7344
$  ln README .message
7345
@end smallexample
7346
 
7347
@subsubheading Update the web pages.
7348
 
7349
@table @file
7350
 
7351
@item htdocs/download/ANNOUNCEMENT
7352
This file, which is posted as the official announcement, includes:
7353
@itemize @bullet
7354
@item
7355
General announcement.
7356
@item
7357
News.  If making an @var{M}.@var{N}.1 release, retain the news from
7358
earlier @var{M}.@var{N} release.
7359
@item
7360
Errata.
7361
@end itemize
7362
 
7363
@item htdocs/index.html
7364
@itemx htdocs/news/index.html
7365
@itemx htdocs/download/index.html
7366
These files include:
7367
@itemize @bullet
7368
@item
7369
Announcement of the most recent release.
7370
@item
7371
News entry (remember to update both the top level and the news directory).
7372
@end itemize
7373
These pages also need to be regenerate using @code{index.sh}.
7374
 
7375
@item download/onlinedocs/
7376
You need to find the magic command that is used to generate the online
7377
docs from the @file{.tar.bz2}.  The best way is to look in the output
7378
from one of the nightly @code{cron} jobs and then just edit accordingly.
7379
Something like:
7380
 
7381
@smallexample
7382
$  ~/ss/update-web-docs \
7383
 ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases/gdb-5.2.tar.bz2 \
7384
 $PWD/www \
7385
 /www/sourceware/htdocs/gdb/download/onlinedocs \
7386
 gdb
7387
@end smallexample
7388
 
7389
@item download/ari/
7390
Just like the online documentation.  Something like:
7391
 
7392
@smallexample
7393
$  /bin/sh ~/ss/update-web-ari \
7394
 ~ftp/pub/gdb/releases/gdb-5.2.tar.bz2 \
7395
 $PWD/www \
7396
 /www/sourceware/htdocs/gdb/download/ari \
7397
 gdb
7398
@end smallexample
7399
 
7400
@end table
7401
 
7402
@subsubheading Shadow the pages onto gnu
7403
 
7404
Something goes here.
7405
 
7406
 
7407
@subsubheading Install the @value{GDBN} tar ball on GNU
7408
 
7409
At the time of writing, the GNU machine was @kbd{gnudist.gnu.org} in
7410
@file{~ftp/gnu/gdb}.
7411
 
7412
@subsubheading Make the @file{ANNOUNCEMENT}
7413
 
7414
Post the @file{ANNOUNCEMENT} file you created above to:
7415
 
7416
@itemize @bullet
7417
@item
7418
@email{gdb-announce@@sourceware.org, GDB Announcement mailing list}
7419
@item
7420
@email{info-gnu@@gnu.org, General GNU Announcement list} (but delay it a
7421
day or so to let things get out)
7422
@item
7423
@email{bug-gdb@@gnu.org, GDB Bug Report mailing list}
7424
@end itemize
7425
 
7426
@subsection Cleanup
7427
 
7428
The release is out but you're still not finished.
7429
 
7430
@subsubheading Commit outstanding changes
7431
 
7432
In particular you'll need to commit any changes to:
7433
 
7434
@itemize @bullet
7435
@item
7436
@file{gdb/ChangeLog}
7437
@item
7438
@file{gdb/version.in}
7439
@item
7440
@file{gdb/NEWS}
7441
@item
7442
@file{gdb/README}
7443
@end itemize
7444
 
7445
@subsubheading Tag the release
7446
 
7447
Something like:
7448
 
7449
@smallexample
7450
$  d=`date -u +%Y-%m-%d`
7451
$  echo $d
7452
2002-01-24
7453
$  ( cd insight/src/gdb && cvs -f -q update )
7454
$  ( cd insight/src && cvs -f -q tag gdb_5_2-$d-release )
7455
@end smallexample
7456
 
7457
Insight is used since that contains more of the release than
7458
@value{GDBN}.
7459
 
7460
@subsubheading Mention the release on the trunk
7461
 
7462
Just put something in the @file{ChangeLog} so that the trunk also
7463
indicates when the release was made.
7464
 
7465
@subsubheading Restart @file{gdb/version.in}
7466
 
7467
If @file{gdb/version.in} does not contain an ISO date such as
7468
@kbd{2002-01-24} then the daily @code{cronjob} won't update it.  Having
7469
committed all the release changes it can be set to
7470
@file{5.2.0_0000-00-00-cvs} which will restart things (yes the @kbd{_}
7471
is important - it affects the snapshot process).
7472
 
7473
Don't forget the @file{ChangeLog}.
7474
 
7475
@subsubheading Merge into trunk
7476
 
7477
The files committed to the branch may also need changes merged into the
7478
trunk.
7479
 
7480
@subsubheading Revise the release schedule
7481
 
7482
Post a revised release schedule to @email{gdb@@sourceware.org, GDB
7483
Discussion List} with an updated announcement.  The schedule can be
7484
generated by running:
7485
 
7486
@smallexample
7487
$  ~/ss/schedule `date +%s` schedule
7488
@end smallexample
7489
 
7490
@noindent
7491
The first parameter is approximate date/time in seconds (from the epoch)
7492
of the most recent release.
7493
 
7494
Also update the schedule @code{cronjob}.
7495
 
7496
@section Post release
7497
 
7498
Remove any @code{OBSOLETE} code.
7499
 
7500
@node Testsuite
7501
 
7502
@chapter Testsuite
7503
@cindex test suite
7504
 
7505
The testsuite is an important component of the @value{GDBN} package.
7506
While it is always worthwhile to encourage user testing, in practice
7507
this is rarely sufficient; users typically use only a small subset of
7508
the available commands, and it has proven all too common for a change
7509
to cause a significant regression that went unnoticed for some time.
7510
 
7511
The @value{GDBN} testsuite uses the DejaGNU testing framework.  The
7512
tests themselves are calls to various @code{Tcl} procs; the framework
7513
runs all the procs and summarizes the passes and fails.
7514
 
7515
@section Using the Testsuite
7516
 
7517
@cindex running the test suite
7518
To run the testsuite, simply go to the @value{GDBN} object directory (or to the
7519
testsuite's objdir) and type @code{make check}.  This just sets up some
7520
environment variables and invokes DejaGNU's @code{runtest} script.  While
7521
the testsuite is running, you'll get mentions of which test file is in use,
7522
and a mention of any unexpected passes or fails.  When the testsuite is
7523
finished, you'll get a summary that looks like this:
7524
 
7525
@smallexample
7526
                === gdb Summary ===
7527
 
7528
# of expected passes            6016
7529
# of unexpected failures        58
7530
# of unexpected successes       5
7531
# of expected failures          183
7532
# of unresolved testcases       3
7533
# of untested testcases         5
7534
@end smallexample
7535
 
7536
To run a specific test script, type:
7537
@example
7538
make check RUNTESTFLAGS='@var{tests}'
7539
@end example
7540
where @var{tests} is a list of test script file names, separated by
7541
spaces.
7542
 
7543
If you use GNU make, you can use its @option{-j} option to run the
7544
testsuite in parallel.  This can greatly reduce the amount of time it
7545
takes for the testsuite to run.  In this case, if you set
7546
@code{RUNTESTFLAGS} then, by default, the tests will be run serially
7547
even under @option{-j}.  You can override this and force a parallel run
7548
by setting the @code{make} variable @code{FORCE_PARALLEL} to any
7549
non-empty value.  Note that the parallel @kbd{make check} assumes
7550
that you want to run the entire testsuite, so it is not compatible
7551
with some dejagnu options, like @option{--directory}.
7552
 
7553
The ideal test run consists of expected passes only; however, reality
7554
conspires to keep us from this ideal.  Unexpected failures indicate
7555
real problems, whether in @value{GDBN} or in the testsuite.  Expected
7556
failures are still failures, but ones which have been decided are too
7557
hard to deal with at the time; for instance, a test case might work
7558
everywhere except on AIX, and there is no prospect of the AIX case
7559
being fixed in the near future.  Expected failures should not be added
7560
lightly, since you may be masking serious bugs in @value{GDBN}.
7561
Unexpected successes are expected fails that are passing for some
7562
reason, while unresolved and untested cases often indicate some minor
7563
catastrophe, such as the compiler being unable to deal with a test
7564
program.
7565
 
7566
When making any significant change to @value{GDBN}, you should run the
7567
testsuite before and after the change, to confirm that there are no
7568
regressions.  Note that truly complete testing would require that you
7569
run the testsuite with all supported configurations and a variety of
7570
compilers; however this is more than really necessary.  In many cases
7571
testing with a single configuration is sufficient.  Other useful
7572
options are to test one big-endian (Sparc) and one little-endian (x86)
7573
host, a cross config with a builtin simulator (powerpc-eabi,
7574
mips-elf), or a 64-bit host (Alpha).
7575
 
7576
If you add new functionality to @value{GDBN}, please consider adding
7577
tests for it as well; this way future @value{GDBN} hackers can detect
7578
and fix their changes that break the functionality you added.
7579
Similarly, if you fix a bug that was not previously reported as a test
7580
failure, please add a test case for it.  Some cases are extremely
7581
difficult to test, such as code that handles host OS failures or bugs
7582
in particular versions of compilers, and it's OK not to try to write
7583
tests for all of those.
7584
 
7585
DejaGNU supports separate build, host, and target machines.  However,
7586
some @value{GDBN} test scripts do not work if the build machine and
7587
the host machine are not the same.  In such an environment, these scripts
7588
will give a result of ``UNRESOLVED'', like this:
7589
 
7590
@smallexample
7591
UNRESOLVED: gdb.base/example.exp: This test script does not work on a remote host.
7592
@end smallexample
7593
 
7594
@section Testsuite Parameters
7595
 
7596
Several variables exist to modify the behavior of the testsuite.
7597
 
7598
@itemize @bullet
7599
 
7600
@item @code{TRANSCRIPT}
7601
 
7602
Sometimes it is convenient to get a transcript of the commands which
7603
the testsuite sends to @value{GDBN}.  For example, if @value{GDBN}
7604
crashes during testing, a transcript can be used to more easily
7605
reconstruct the failure when running @value{GDBN} under @value{GDBN}.
7606
 
7607
You can instruct the @value{GDBN} testsuite to write transcripts by
7608
setting the DejaGNU variable @code{TRANSCRIPT} (to any value)
7609
before invoking @code{runtest} or @kbd{make check}.  The transcripts
7610
will be written into DejaGNU's output directory.  One transcript will
7611
be made for each invocation of @value{GDBN}; they will be named
7612
@file{transcript.@var{n}}, where @var{n} is an integer.  The first
7613
line of the transcript file will show how @value{GDBN} was invoked;
7614
each subsequent line is a command sent as input to @value{GDBN}.
7615
 
7616
@smallexample
7617
make check RUNTESTFLAGS=TRANSCRIPT=y
7618
@end smallexample
7619
 
7620
Note that the transcript is not always complete.  In particular, tests
7621
of completion can yield partial command lines.
7622
 
7623
@item @code{GDB}
7624
 
7625
Sometimes one wishes to test a different @value{GDBN} than the one in the build
7626
directory.  For example, one may wish to run the testsuite on
7627
@file{/usr/bin/gdb}.
7628
 
7629
@smallexample
7630
make check RUNTESTFLAGS=GDB=/usr/bin/gdb
7631
@end smallexample
7632
 
7633
@item @code{GDBSERVER}
7634
 
7635
When testing a different @value{GDBN}, it is often useful to also test a
7636
different gdbserver.
7637
 
7638
@smallexample
7639
make check RUNTESTFLAGS="GDB=/usr/bin/gdb GDBSERVER=/usr/bin/gdbserver"
7640
@end smallexample
7641
 
7642
@item @code{INTERNAL_GDBFLAGS}
7643
 
7644
When running the testsuite normally one doesn't want whatever is in
7645
@file{~/.gdbinit} to interfere with the tests, therefore the test harness
7646
passes @option{-nx} to @value{GDBN}.  One also doesn't want any windowed
7647
version of @value{GDBN}, e.g., @command{gdbtui}, to run.
7648
This is achieved via @code{INTERNAL_GDBFLAGS}.
7649
 
7650
@smallexample
7651
set INTERNAL_GDBFLAGS "-nw -nx"
7652
@end smallexample
7653
 
7654
This is all well and good, except when testing an installed @value{GDBN}
7655
that has been configured with @option{--with-system-gdbinit}.  Here one
7656
does not want @file{~/.gdbinit} loaded but one may want the system
7657
@file{.gdbinit} file loaded.  This can be achieved by pointing @code{$HOME}
7658
at a directory without a @file{.gdbinit} and by overriding
7659
@code{INTERNAL_GDBFLAGS} and removing @option{-nx}.
7660
 
7661
@smallexample
7662
cd testsuite
7663
HOME=`pwd` runtest \
7664
  GDB=/usr/bin/gdb \
7665
  GDBSERVER=/usr/bin/gdbserver \
7666
  INTERNAL_GDBFLAGS=-nw
7667
@end smallexample
7668
 
7669
@end itemize
7670
 
7671
There are two ways to run the testsuite and pass additional parameters
7672
to DejaGnu.  The first is with @kbd{make check} and specifying the
7673
makefile variable @samp{RUNTESTFLAGS}.
7674
 
7675
@smallexample
7676
make check RUNTESTFLAGS=TRANSCRIPT=y
7677
@end smallexample
7678
 
7679
The second is to cd to the @file{testsuite} directory and invoke the DejaGnu
7680
@command{runtest} command directly.
7681
 
7682
@smallexample
7683
cd testsuite
7684
make site.exp
7685
runtest TRANSCRIPT=y
7686
@end smallexample
7687
 
7688
@section Testsuite Configuration
7689
@cindex Testsuite Configuration
7690
 
7691
It is possible to adjust the behavior of the testsuite by defining
7692
the global variables listed below, either in a @file{site.exp} file,
7693
or in a board file.
7694
 
7695
@itemize @bullet
7696
 
7697
@item @code{gdb_test_timeout}
7698
 
7699
Defining this variable changes the default timeout duration used during
7700
communication with @value{GDBN}.  More specifically, the global variable
7701
used during testing is @code{timeout}, but this variable gets reset to
7702
@code{gdb_test_timeout} at the beginning of each testcase, making sure
7703
that any local change to @code{timeout} in a testcase does not affect
7704
subsequent testcases.
7705
 
7706
This global variable comes in handy when the debugger is slower than
7707
normal due to the testing environment, triggering unexpected @code{TIMEOUT}
7708
test failures.  Examples include when testing on a remote machine, or
7709
against a system where communications are slow.
7710
 
7711
If not specifically defined, this variable gets automatically defined
7712
to the same value as @code{timeout} during the testsuite initialization.
7713
The default value of the timeout is defined in the file
7714
@file{gdb/testsuite/config/unix.exp} that is part of the @value{GDBN}
7715
test suite@footnote{If you are using a board file, it could override
7716
the test-suite default; search the board file for "timeout".}.
7717
 
7718
@end itemize
7719
 
7720
@section Testsuite Organization
7721
 
7722
@cindex test suite organization
7723
The testsuite is entirely contained in @file{gdb/testsuite}.  While the
7724
testsuite includes some makefiles and configury, these are very minimal,
7725
and used for little besides cleaning up, since the tests themselves
7726
handle the compilation of the programs that @value{GDBN} will run.  The file
7727
@file{testsuite/lib/gdb.exp} contains common utility procs useful for
7728
all @value{GDBN} tests, while the directory @file{testsuite/config} contains
7729
configuration-specific files, typically used for special-purpose
7730
definitions of procs like @code{gdb_load} and @code{gdb_start}.
7731
 
7732
The tests themselves are to be found in @file{testsuite/gdb.*} and
7733
subdirectories of those.  The names of the test files must always end
7734
with @file{.exp}.  DejaGNU collects the test files by wildcarding
7735
in the test directories, so both subdirectories and individual files
7736
get chosen and run in alphabetical order.
7737
 
7738
The following table lists the main types of subdirectories and what they
7739
are for.  Since DejaGNU finds test files no matter where they are
7740
located, and since each test file sets up its own compilation and
7741
execution environment, this organization is simply for convenience and
7742
intelligibility.
7743
 
7744
@table @file
7745
@item gdb.base
7746
This is the base testsuite.  The tests in it should apply to all
7747
configurations of @value{GDBN} (but generic native-only tests may live here).
7748
The test programs should be in the subset of C that is valid K&R,
7749
ANSI/ISO, and C@t{++} (@code{#ifdef}s are allowed if necessary, for instance
7750
for prototypes).
7751
 
7752
@item gdb.@var{lang}
7753
Language-specific tests for any language @var{lang} besides C.  Examples are
7754
@file{gdb.cp} and @file{gdb.java}.
7755
 
7756
@item gdb.@var{platform}
7757
Non-portable tests.  The tests are specific to a specific configuration
7758
(host or target), such as HP-UX or eCos.  Example is @file{gdb.hp}, for
7759
HP-UX.
7760
 
7761
@item gdb.@var{compiler}
7762
Tests specific to a particular compiler.  As of this writing (June
7763
1999), there aren't currently any groups of tests in this category that
7764
couldn't just as sensibly be made platform-specific, but one could
7765
imagine a @file{gdb.gcc}, for tests of @value{GDBN}'s handling of GCC
7766
extensions.
7767
 
7768
@item gdb.@var{subsystem}
7769
Tests that exercise a specific @value{GDBN} subsystem in more depth.  For
7770
instance, @file{gdb.disasm} exercises various disassemblers, while
7771
@file{gdb.stabs} tests pathways through the stabs symbol reader.
7772
@end table
7773
 
7774
@section Writing Tests
7775
@cindex writing tests
7776
 
7777
In many areas, the @value{GDBN} tests are already quite comprehensive; you
7778
should be able to copy existing tests to handle new cases.
7779
 
7780
You should try to use @code{gdb_test} whenever possible, since it
7781
includes cases to handle all the unexpected errors that might happen.
7782
However, it doesn't cost anything to add new test procedures; for
7783
instance, @file{gdb.base/exprs.exp} defines a @code{test_expr} that
7784
calls @code{gdb_test} multiple times.
7785
 
7786
Only use @code{send_gdb} and @code{gdb_expect} when absolutely
7787
necessary.  Even if @value{GDBN} has several valid responses to
7788
a command, you can use @code{gdb_test_multiple}.  Like @code{gdb_test},
7789
@code{gdb_test_multiple} recognizes internal errors and unexpected
7790
prompts.
7791
 
7792
Do not write tests which expect a literal tab character from @value{GDBN}.
7793
On some operating systems (e.g.@: OpenBSD) the TTY layer expands tabs to
7794
spaces, so by the time @value{GDBN}'s output reaches expect the tab is gone.
7795
 
7796
The source language programs do @emph{not} need to be in a consistent
7797
style.  Since @value{GDBN} is used to debug programs written in many different
7798
styles, it's worth having a mix of styles in the testsuite; for
7799
instance, some @value{GDBN} bugs involving the display of source lines would
7800
never manifest themselves if the programs used GNU coding style
7801
uniformly.
7802
 
7803
@node Hints
7804
 
7805
@chapter Hints
7806
 
7807
Check the @file{README} file, it often has useful information that does not
7808
appear anywhere else in the directory.
7809
 
7810
@menu
7811
* Getting Started::             Getting started working on @value{GDBN}
7812
* Debugging GDB::               Debugging @value{GDBN} with itself
7813
@end menu
7814
 
7815
@node Getting Started
7816
 
7817
@section Getting Started
7818
 
7819
@value{GDBN} is a large and complicated program, and if you first starting to
7820
work on it, it can be hard to know where to start.  Fortunately, if you
7821
know how to go about it, there are ways to figure out what is going on.
7822
 
7823
This manual, the @value{GDBN} Internals manual, has information which applies
7824
generally to many parts of @value{GDBN}.
7825
 
7826
Information about particular functions or data structures are located in
7827
comments with those functions or data structures.  If you run across a
7828
function or a global variable which does not have a comment correctly
7829
explaining what is does, this can be thought of as a bug in @value{GDBN}; feel
7830
free to submit a bug report, with a suggested comment if you can figure
7831
out what the comment should say.  If you find a comment which is
7832
actually wrong, be especially sure to report that.
7833
 
7834
Comments explaining the function of macros defined in host, target, or
7835
native dependent files can be in several places.  Sometimes they are
7836
repeated every place the macro is defined.  Sometimes they are where the
7837
macro is used.  Sometimes there is a header file which supplies a
7838
default definition of the macro, and the comment is there.  This manual
7839
also documents all the available macros.
7840
@c (@pxref{Host Conditionals}, @pxref{Target
7841
@c Conditionals}, @pxref{Native Conditionals}, and @pxref{Obsolete
7842
@c Conditionals})
7843
 
7844
Start with the header files.  Once you have some idea of how
7845
@value{GDBN}'s internal symbol tables are stored (see @file{symtab.h},
7846
@file{gdbtypes.h}), you will find it much easier to understand the
7847
code which uses and creates those symbol tables.
7848
 
7849
You may wish to process the information you are getting somehow, to
7850
enhance your understanding of it.  Summarize it, translate it to another
7851
language, add some (perhaps trivial or non-useful) feature to @value{GDBN}, use
7852
the code to predict what a test case would do and write the test case
7853
and verify your prediction, etc.  If you are reading code and your eyes
7854
are starting to glaze over, this is a sign you need to use a more active
7855
approach.
7856
 
7857
Once you have a part of @value{GDBN} to start with, you can find more
7858
specifically the part you are looking for by stepping through each
7859
function with the @code{next} command.  Do not use @code{step} or you
7860
will quickly get distracted; when the function you are stepping through
7861
calls another function try only to get a big-picture understanding
7862
(perhaps using the comment at the beginning of the function being
7863
called) of what it does.  This way you can identify which of the
7864
functions being called by the function you are stepping through is the
7865
one which you are interested in.  You may need to examine the data
7866
structures generated at each stage, with reference to the comments in
7867
the header files explaining what the data structures are supposed to
7868
look like.
7869
 
7870
Of course, this same technique can be used if you are just reading the
7871
code, rather than actually stepping through it.  The same general
7872
principle applies---when the code you are looking at calls something
7873
else, just try to understand generally what the code being called does,
7874
rather than worrying about all its details.
7875
 
7876
@cindex command implementation
7877
A good place to start when tracking down some particular area is with
7878
a command which invokes that feature.  Suppose you want to know how
7879
single-stepping works.  As a @value{GDBN} user, you know that the
7880
@code{step} command invokes single-stepping.  The command is invoked
7881
via command tables (see @file{command.h}); by convention the function
7882
which actually performs the command is formed by taking the name of
7883
the command and adding @samp{_command}, or in the case of an
7884
@code{info} subcommand, @samp{_info}.  For example, the @code{step}
7885
command invokes the @code{step_command} function and the @code{info
7886
display} command invokes @code{display_info}.  When this convention is
7887
not followed, you might have to use @code{grep} or @kbd{M-x
7888
tags-search} in emacs, or run @value{GDBN} on itself and set a
7889
breakpoint in @code{execute_command}.
7890
 
7891
@cindex @code{bug-gdb} mailing list
7892
If all of the above fail, it may be appropriate to ask for information
7893
on @code{bug-gdb}.  But @emph{never} post a generic question like ``I was
7894
wondering if anyone could give me some tips about understanding
7895
@value{GDBN}''---if we had some magic secret we would put it in this manual.
7896
Suggestions for improving the manual are always welcome, of course.
7897
 
7898
@node Debugging GDB
7899
 
7900
@section Debugging @value{GDBN} with itself
7901
@cindex debugging @value{GDBN}
7902
 
7903
If @value{GDBN} is limping on your machine, this is the preferred way to get it
7904
fully functional.  Be warned that in some ancient Unix systems, like
7905
Ultrix 4.2, a program can't be running in one process while it is being
7906
debugged in another.  Rather than typing the command @kbd{@w{./gdb
7907
./gdb}}, which works on Suns and such, you can copy @file{gdb} to
7908
@file{gdb2} and then type @kbd{@w{./gdb ./gdb2}}.
7909
 
7910
When you run @value{GDBN} in the @value{GDBN} source directory, it will read a
7911
@file{.gdbinit} file that sets up some simple things to make debugging
7912
gdb easier.  The @code{info} command, when executed without a subcommand
7913
in a @value{GDBN} being debugged by gdb, will pop you back up to the top level
7914
gdb.  See @file{.gdbinit} for details.
7915
 
7916
If you use emacs, you will probably want to do a @code{make TAGS} after
7917
you configure your distribution; this will put the machine dependent
7918
routines for your local machine where they will be accessed first by
7919
@kbd{M-.}
7920
 
7921
Also, make sure that you've either compiled @value{GDBN} with your local cc, or
7922
have run @code{fixincludes} if you are compiling with gcc.
7923
 
7924
@section Submitting Patches
7925
 
7926
@cindex submitting patches
7927
Thanks for thinking of offering your changes back to the community of
7928
@value{GDBN} users.  In general we like to get well designed enhancements.
7929
Thanks also for checking in advance about the best way to transfer the
7930
changes.
7931
 
7932
The @value{GDBN} maintainers will only install ``cleanly designed'' patches.
7933
This manual summarizes what we believe to be clean design for @value{GDBN}.
7934
 
7935
If the maintainers don't have time to put the patch in when it arrives,
7936
or if there is any question about a patch, it goes into a large queue
7937
with everyone else's patches and bug reports.
7938
 
7939
@cindex legal papers for code contributions
7940
The legal issue is that to incorporate substantial changes requires a
7941
copyright assignment from you and/or your employer, granting ownership
7942
of the changes to the Free Software Foundation.  You can get the
7943
standard documents for doing this by sending mail to @code{gnu@@gnu.org}
7944
and asking for it.  We recommend that people write in "All programs
7945
owned by the Free Software Foundation" as "NAME OF PROGRAM", so that
7946
changes in many programs (not just @value{GDBN}, but GAS, Emacs, GCC,
7947
etc) can be
7948
contributed with only one piece of legalese pushed through the
7949
bureaucracy and filed with the FSF.  We can't start merging changes until
7950
this paperwork is received by the FSF (their rules, which we follow
7951
since we maintain it for them).
7952
 
7953
Technically, the easiest way to receive changes is to receive each
7954
feature as a small context diff or unidiff, suitable for @code{patch}.
7955
Each message sent to me should include the changes to C code and
7956
header files for a single feature, plus @file{ChangeLog} entries for
7957
each directory where files were modified, and diffs for any changes
7958
needed to the manuals (@file{gdb/doc/gdb.texinfo} or
7959
@file{gdb/doc/gdbint.texinfo}).  If there are a lot of changes for a
7960
single feature, they can be split down into multiple messages.
7961
 
7962
In this way, if we read and like the feature, we can add it to the
7963
sources with a single patch command, do some testing, and check it in.
7964
If you leave out the @file{ChangeLog}, we have to write one.  If you leave
7965
out the doc, we have to puzzle out what needs documenting.  Etc., etc.
7966
 
7967
The reason to send each change in a separate message is that we will not
7968
install some of the changes.  They'll be returned to you with questions
7969
or comments.  If we're doing our job correctly, the message back to you
7970
will say what you have to fix in order to make the change acceptable.
7971
The reason to have separate messages for separate features is so that
7972
the acceptable changes can be installed while one or more changes are
7973
being reworked.  If multiple features are sent in a single message, we
7974
tend to not put in the effort to sort out the acceptable changes from
7975
the unacceptable, so none of the features get installed until all are
7976
acceptable.
7977
 
7978
If this sounds painful or authoritarian, well, it is.  But we get a lot
7979
of bug reports and a lot of patches, and many of them don't get
7980
installed because we don't have the time to finish the job that the bug
7981
reporter or the contributor could have done.  Patches that arrive
7982
complete, working, and well designed, tend to get installed on the day
7983
they arrive.  The others go into a queue and get installed as time
7984
permits, which, since the maintainers have many demands to meet, may not
7985
be for quite some time.
7986
 
7987
Please send patches directly to
7988
@email{gdb-patches@@sourceware.org, the @value{GDBN} maintainers}.
7989
 
7990
@section Build Script
7991
 
7992
@cindex build script
7993
 
7994
The script @file{gdb_buildall.sh} builds @value{GDBN} with flag
7995
@option{--enable-targets=all} set.  This builds @value{GDBN} with all supported
7996
targets activated.  This helps testing @value{GDBN} when doing changes that
7997
affect more than one architecture and is much faster than using
7998
@file{gdb_mbuild.sh}.
7999
 
8000
After building @value{GDBN} the script checks which architectures are
8001
supported and then switches the current architecture to each of those to get
8002
information about the architecture.  The test results are stored in log files
8003
in the directory the script was called from.
8004
 
8005
@include observer.texi
8006
 
8007
@node GNU Free Documentation License
8008
@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8009
@include fdl.texi
8010
 
8011
@node Index
8012
@unnumbered Index
8013
 
8014
@printindex cp
8015
 
8016
@bye

powered by: WebSVN 2.1.0

© copyright 1999-2024 OpenCores.org, equivalent to Oliscience, all rights reserved. OpenCores®, registered trademark.